You are on page 1of 671

SERVICE MANUAL

CLISIS EXEL

90/90 REMOTE TILTING TABLE UNIT

Manual code:

SM-CSASF02-EN
(R01)

GENERAL MEDICAL MERATE S.p.A.


VIA PARTIGIANI 25, 24068 SERIATE (BG) – ITALIA
ТЕL. +39 035 45 25 311
FAX +39 035 29 77 87
www.gmmspa.com info@gmmspa.com 0051

CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 1 / 9


CLISIS EXEL
SERVICE MANUAL

MODIFICATION HISTORY

Rev. Date Description

000 06/2009 First edition. Valid from s/n 005/171

01 05/2012 Updated with general reviewing and Integrated Console

01 09/05/2012 Corrigenda: number of the section of reference

CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 2 / 9


THE INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE CONFORM WITH THE
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. REVISIONS TO
THE EQUIPMENT SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WILL BE ADDRESSED
IN THE USER MANUAL UPDATES DISTRIBUTED BY THE GMM SERVICE ORGANISATION

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL:

THE USER OF THIS MANUAL IS DIRECTED TO READ AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE INSTRUCTIONS,
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE USE OF THE UNIT.
WHILE YOU MAY HAVE PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT SIMILAR TO THAT DESCRIBED IN THIS
MANUAL, CHANGES IN DESIGN, MANUFACTURE OR PROCEDURE MAY HAVE OCCURRED WHICH
SIGNIFICANTLY THE SAFE USE OF THE UNIT.
THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED HEREIN IS TO BE PERFORMED BY
AUTHORIZED, QUALIFIED GMM PERSONNEL.
OTHER PERSONNEL NOT EMPLOYED BY NOR DIRECTLY AFFILIATED WITH GMM TECHNICAL
SERVICES ARE DIRECTED TO CONTACT THE LOCAL GMM OFFICE OR DEALER BEFORE
ATTEMPTING SERVICE PROCEDURES.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN ORIGINALLY DRAFTED IN ENGLISH AND ITALIAN LANGUAGES.

DIAGNOSTIC X-ray SYSTEMS


RADIATION WARNING

X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAYS ARE DANGEROUS TO BOTH OPERATOR AND OTHERS IN THE VICINITY
UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFE EXPOSURE PROCEDURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
THE USEFUL AND SCATTERED BEAMS CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO
ANY PERSON IN THE SURROUNDING AREA IF USED BY AN UNSKILLED OPERATOR. ADEQUATE
PRECAUTIONS MUST ALWAYS BE TAKEN TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE USEFUL BEAM, AS WELL AS
TO SCATTERED RADIATION RESULTING FROM THE PASSAGE OF RADIATION THROUGH MATTER.
THOSE AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE, PARTICIPATE IN, OR SUPERVISE THE OPERATION OF THE
EQUIPMENT MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH THE CURRENT
ESTABILISHED SAFE EXPOSURES FACTORS AND PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN PUBLICATIONS,
SUCH AS: SUBCHAPTER J OF TITLE 21 OF THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS, “ DIAGNOSTIC X-
ray SYSTEMS AND THEIR MAJOR COMPONENTS “, AND IEC 60601 GENERAL AND COLLATERAL
STANDARDS AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE
THOSE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PLANNING OF X-RAY AND GAMMA-RAY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS
MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR AND COMPLY COMPLETELY WITH:
NCRP NO. 49 “ STRUCTURAL SHIELDING DESIGN AND EVALUATION FOR MEDICAL X-RAYS AND
GAMMA-RAYS OF ENERGIES UP TO 10 MEV “ AND IEC-407 “ RADIATION PROTECTION IN MEDICAL X-
RAY EQUIPMENTS 10KV - 400KV “ AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE WARNINGS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES TO
THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

3 / 671
INSTALLATION AND ENVIROMENT

EXCEPT FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER PER FEDERAL


STANDARDS, SEE THAT A RADIATION PROTECTION SURVEY IS MADE BY A QUALIFIED EXPERT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH NCRP 102, SECTION 7 OR IEC RELATED GENERAL AND COLLATERAL
STANDARD AS REVISED OR REPLACED IN THE FUTURE.
PERFORM A SURVEY AFTER EVERY CHANGE IN EQUIPMENT, WORKLOAD, OR OPERATING
CONDITIONS WHICH MIGHT SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF PERSONS RECEIVING
MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE EQUIVALENT.

DIAGNOSTIC X-ray SYSTEMS


MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL WARNING

ALL OF THE MOVABLE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE OPERATED WITH
CARE AND ROUTINELY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THE EQUIPMENT MANUALS.
NLY PROPERLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE PERMITTED ACCESS TO ANY
INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS ARE DEADLY; BE SURE LINE DISCONNECT
SWITCHES ARE OPENED AND OTHER APPROPIATE PRECAUTIONS ARE TAKEN BEFORE OPENING
ACCESS DOORS, REMOVING ENCLOSURES PANELS, OR ATTACHING ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT REMOVE FLEXIBLE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES FROM X-RAY TUBE HOUSING OR HIGH
TENSION GENERATOR AND/OR ACCESS COVERS FROM GENERATOR UNTIL THE MAIN AND
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES HAVE BEEN DISCONNECTED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE FOREGOING MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS OR FATAL BODILY INJURIES
TO THE OPERATOR OR THOSE IN THE AREA.

THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN PREPARED AND DISTRIBUTED BY GMM TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
DEPARTMENT.

ADDRESS INQUIRES REGARDING THIS DOCUMENT TO:

GENERAL MEDICAL MERATE S.p.A.


VIA PARTIGIANI 25, 24068 SERIATE (BG) – ITALIA
ТЕL. +39 035 45 25 311
FAX +39 035 29 77 87
www.gmmspa.com info@gmmspa.com

GMM X-ray equipment declines all responsibility with regard to the proper functioning of the
equipment, should the installation or the maintenance of it be executed by unauthorized
personnel.

CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 4 / 9

4 / 671
INDEX
A TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS
A.1 WARNING SYMBOLS ON THE EQUIPMENT
A1.1. FUNCTIONSUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS

1. UNIT DESCRIPTION
1.1. INTRODUCTION
1.2. SYSTEM COMPOSITION
1.3. ACCESSORIES
1.4. TABLE APPLICATIONS AND INTEDED USE
1.5. SAFETY
1.6. PROTECTION CLASS
1.7. ELECTRICAL SAFETY
1.8. SAFETY DEVICE FOR CASSETTEINSERTION/REMOVAL
1.9. SAFETY DEVICE FOR COMPRESSION CONE
1.10. EMERGENCY SWITCH
1.11. COLLISION PROTECTION
1.12. PROTECTION AGAINST RADIATION HAZARD
1.13. PROTECTION AGAINST EXPLOSION HAZARD
1.14. RESIDUAL RISKS & ACCIDENT HAZARD

2. TECHNICAL DATA
2.1. WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS
2.2. TABLE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
2.3. MINIMUM TABLETOP HEIGHT AS FUNCTION OF THE IMAGE SYSTEM MODEL
2.4. CASTOR GENERATORS PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
2.5. DEIMOS GENERATORS PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
2.6. REGULATIONS COMPLIANCE
2.7. OMPATIBILITY WITH OTHER ACCESSORIES
2.8. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

3. UNIT IDENTIFICATION
3.1. IDENTIFICATION & WARNING LABELS

4 STORAGE AND USE


4.1 PACKING
4.2 STORAGE CONDITIONS
4.3 USE CONDITIONS

5 ROOM PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENT


5.1. INTRODUCTION
5.2 ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION
5.3 ROOM REQUIREMENTS
5.4 SYSTEM CABLES
5.5 BASE PLATE INSTALLATION
5.6 SYSTEM GROUNDING
5.7 INPUT LINE AND EMERGENCY CIRCUITS
5.8 INPUT LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION

5 / 671
CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 5 / 9

6 / 671
6. INSTALLATION
6.1 TILTING TABLE INSTALLATION
6.2 MOUNTING THE MAIN FRAME ASSEMBLY
6.3 MOUNTING THE TUBE ARM SUPPORT
6.4 MOUNTING THE SPOT FILM DEVICE
6.5 MOUNTING THE COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY
6.6 MOUNTING THE X-RAY TUBE
6.7 MOUNTING THE COLLIMATOR
6.8 MOUNTING THE I.I./TV CAMERA ASSEMBLY
6.9 MOUNTING THE TABLETOP
6.10 CONTROL DESK INSTALLATION
6.11 MOUNTING THE COVERS

7 INTERFACE CIRCUIT
7.1 INTRODUCTION
7.2 INTERFACE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
7.3 GENERATOR INTERFACE SIGNALS
7.4 CASTOR GENERATORS & CD100 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE
7.5 DEIMOS GENERATOR & CD100 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE
7.6 CASTOR GENERATORS & CD1000 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE
7.7 CASTOR GENERATOR & HIRIS IMAGE PROCESSOR INTERFACE
7.8 DEIMOS GENERATOR & HIRIS IMAGE PROCESSOR INTERFACE
7.9 DEIMOS GENERATOR & PLATINUM ONE PROCESSOR INTERFACE
8. UNIT START-UP & SOFTWARE CALIBRATIONS
8.1 UNIT FUNCTIONALCHECK
8.2 CONFIGURATION MODE
8.3 ENTERING THE CLISIS EXEL MAINTENANCE MODE
8.3.1 ENTERING THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MODE
8.4 MINIMUM ELEVATION END SWITCHES SETTING
8.5 0° TILT STOP SETTING
8.6 0° COLUMN INCIDENCE STOP SETTING
8.7 SELECTION OF DISPLAY LANGUAGE
8.8 SETTING THE TUBE JOYSTICK ORIENTATION
8.9 TUBE JOYSTICK DYNAMIC RESPONSE SETTING
8.10 TILT AND TUBE JOYSTICK HOME POSITION SETTING
8.11 SETTING THE ROOM CEILING HEIGH
8.12 SELECTION OF I.I. TYPE AND LENGTH
8.13 SETTING THE LEFT WALL DISTANCE
8.14 SETTING THE RIGHT WALL DISTANCE
8.15 TOMO OFF SET mm
8.16 TOMO OFF SET (DIGITAL) mm
8.17 FFD STITCHING (cm)

9 BEAM ALIGNMENT
9.1 INTRODUCTION
9.2 COLLIMATOR AXIS X-RAY BEAM ALIGNMENT CHECK
9.2.1 ALIGNMENT OF THE COLLIMATOR X-RAY BEAM AXIS.
9.2.2 ALIGNMENT AND CHECK OF THE LIGHT FIELD VS X-RAY FIELD
9.2.3 ALIGNMENT AND CHECK OF THE COLLIMATOR CROSS
9.2.4 ALIGNMENT OF THE BEAM WITH THE SFD CENTER
9.2.5 TUBE ANGULATION ADJUSTMENT
9.2.6 TUBE ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
9.2.7 ALIGNEMENT OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER WITH THE SFD CENTRE
9.2.8 CROSS ADJUSTMENT
9.2.9 LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT

7 / 671
9.2.10 COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION CHECK
9.2.11 SFD CALIBRATION CHECK
CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 6 / 9

8 / 671
10. CONTROL CIRCUITS & HW JUMPERS SETTING
10.1 FOREWORD
10.2 CIRCUITS DESCRIPTION
10.3 HW JUMPERS SETTING
10.4 CONSOLE CPU JUMPERS SETTING
10.5 MAIN CPU BOARD JUMPERS SETTING
10.6 MAIN INTERFACE BOARD JUMPERS SETTING
10.7 SFD CPU JUMPERS SETTING
10.8 COLLIMATOR CPU JUMPERS SETTING
10.9 TUBESTAND CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS SETTING

11. SW JUMPERS SETTING


11.1 SET UP SELECTION
11.2 GENERATOR TYPE SELECTION
11.3 JOYSTICK AXIS LOCK SETTING
11.4 COLLIMATOR AUTOMATIC MODALITY SELECTION
11.5 PATIENT LOADING POSITION TABLETOP HEIGHT
11.6 TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CONFIGURATION

12 TABLE FIRMWARE DOWN LOAD AND FACTORY


DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING
12.1 UNIT FIRWARE DOWNLOAD
12.2 MECALL FLASH EPROM PROGRAMMER INSTALLATION
12.3 UNIT MAIN CPU SW DOWNLOAD
12.4 CONSOLE CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
12.5 SFD CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
12.6 COLLIMATOR CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
12.7 SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETER LOADING
12.8 EQUIPMENT MAIN CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT
PARAMETERS LOADING
12.9 CONSOLE CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETERS
LOADING
12.10 SFD CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING
12.11 COLLIMATOR CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETERS
LOADING

13. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE


13.1 USER MAINTENANCE
13.2 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
13.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE – SCHEDULE
13.4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE – INSPECTION
13.5 GENERAL
13.6 END SWITCHES
13.7 MOVEMENTS DECELERATION AREAS CHECK
13.8 SAFETY GROUND CONNECTION CHECK
13.9 TBT ELEVATION MOVEMENT SAFETY BRAKE CHECK
13.9.1 COLLIMATOR LIGHT FIELD/X-RAY FIELD ACCURACY CHECK
13.9.2 BEAM ALIGNMENT CHECK
13.9.3 COLLIMATOR ACCURACY CHECK
13.9.4 TBT ELEVATION SCREW INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION
13.9.5 TUBESTAND CHAIN INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION
13.9.6 SFD CHAIN INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION
13.9.7 TBT ELEVATION POLY-V BELT WARE OUT AND TENSION CHECK
13.9.8 MAXIMUM COMPRESSION LIMIT SWITCH CHECK

9 / 671
13.10 COMPRESSION CONE SAFETY LOCK OPERATION CHECK
13.11 FILM DIVISION ACCURACY CHECK
CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 7 / 9

10 / 671
13.12 TOMOGRAPHY LAYER ACCURACY CHECK
12.13 SFD CASSETTE FORMAT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM CHECK
13.14 SFD CASSETTE LIGHT CELL OPERATION CHECK
13.15 SFD NEAR FILM SHUTTER DRIVE TOOTHED BELT TENSION CHECK
13.16 SFD CASSETTE DRIVE FOR BELT TENSION CHECK

14. TABLE CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE


14.1 TILT BRAKE 24V DC ADJUSTMENT
14.2 POTENTIOMETERS REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.2.1 INTRODUCTION
14.2.2 TABLE ELEVATION POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.2.3 TABLE TILT POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.2.4 COLUMN LONGITUDINAL TRAVEL POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT &
ADJUSTMENT
14.2.5 SFD POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.2.6 FFD POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.3 END SWITCHES /REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT
14.3.1 INTRODUCTION
14.3.2 TABLE ELEVATION END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.3.3 TABLE TILT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.3.4 TUBESTAND LONGITUDINAL TRAVEL END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.3.5 SFD END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.3.6 TUBE FFD END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.3.7 TUBE ROTATION SENSE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
14.4 TABLETOP LATERAL TRAVEL END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.5 COMPRESSOR: PARKING MOVEMENT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.6 COMPRESSOR: VERTICAL MOVEMENT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.7 COMPRESSOR: MAX. PRESSURE SENSE SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
14.8 COMPRESSION CONE FORCE CALIBRATION

15. SFD CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE


15.1.FOREWORD
15.2. CASSETTE TRAY MICROSWITCHES MECHANICAL SETTING
15.3. PROXIMITY SWITCHES SENSING CIRCUIT CALIBRATION
15.4. NEAR FILM SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT
15.5. ADJUSTMENT OF SFD DIVISION
15.6.CALIBRATION OF CASSETTE FORMAT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM.
15.7. CASSETTE SAFETY LIGHT CELL ADJUSTMENT
15.8. ALIGNMENT OF CASSETTE CENTER WITH SFD CENTRE.
15.9.GRID REPLACEMENT
15.10. AEC DETECTOR REPLACEMENT

11 / 671
CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 8 / 9

12 / 671
16. COLLIMATOR CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
16.1 FOREWORD
16.2 OPTICAL SWITCHES REPLACEMENT
16.3 SIMULATION LAMP REPLACEMENT
16.4 COLLIMATOR CROSS REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT
16.5 COLLIMATOR INHERENT FILTRATION MODIFICATION
16.6 COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION
16.6.1 COLLIMATOR DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING
16.7 COLLIMATOR LATERAL SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT
16.8 COLLIMATOR LONGITUDINAL SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT
16.8.1 COLLIMATOR IRIS SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT
16.8.2 COLLIMATOR SHUTTERS MAXIMUM OPENING SETTING
16.8.3 I.I. FILEDS DIMENSION COMPENSATION

17. ERROR MESSAGES


17.1. TABLE ERROR SITUATION MANAGEMENT
17.2. UNIT NORMAL OPERATIVE PHASE
17.3. TABLE ERROR MESSAGES
17.4. GENERATOR –ERROR SITUATION MANAGEMENT
17.5. CASTOR GENERATORS – ERROR MESSAGES
17.6. DEIMOS GENERATOR – OPERATOR AND LIMIT MESSAGES
17.6.1 OPERATOR MESSAGES
17.6.2 LIMIT MESSAGES

18. UNIT INTERCOM CIRCUIT


18.1. INTERCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
18.2. INTERCOM SYSTEM OPERATION
18.3 INTERCOM SYSTEM CALIBRATION
19. END OF LIFE

13 / 671
CLISIS EXEL SERVICE MANUAL INDEX - pag. 9 / 9

14 / 671
A. TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS
In order to facilitate the reading of the manual, different styles and types were used.

The text identified by bullets indicates:

• Instructions to be executed according to the sequence specified.

The following icons are also used:

Important information
It is advisable that extra attention be paid in reading the topics identified with this
symbol.

WARNING
The topics identified with this icon regard aspects of safety for the patient and/or
operator.

15 / 671
1/3

16 / 671
A.1. WARMING SYMBOLS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Warning symbol that indicates potential generic danger for the equipment or the
operator.
Invite the operator to check the equipment documentation for further details.

Hazard symbol that indicates X-ray radiation exposure.

Warning symbol that indicates electrical components which are sensitive to


electrostatic discharge.

Warning symbol that indicates live electrical parts with a possible risk of electric
shock.

Warning symbol that indicates that fingers may be crushed.

Symbol of earth protection.

Ground

Symbol of applied part B type.

Symbol of filtration

Symbol that indicates electrical and electronic components which must be


collected separately.

17 / 671
2 / 3

18 / 671
A.1.1. FUNCTIONING SUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS

Injector

Fluoroscopy and radiography foot pedal

Max. weight.

Housing side – (Grid insertion orientation)

19 / 671
3 / 3
1. UNIT DESCRIPTION
1.1. INTRODUCTION

The Unit is a 90/90 universal remote tilting table system with single end support, variable height
tabletop designed for radiographic and fluoroscopic examinations using standard cassettes.

The special single end support tabletop allows full rear access and easy the transfer of the patient
from the stretcher to the tabletop.

The longitudinal displacement of the X-Ray tube and of the SFD of 160 cm. allows a 203x 43 cm
patient coverage area eliminating the need of patient repositioning.

The main characteristics of this table are:

• Motorised tilting from +90° to -90° (Trendelenburg).

• 500 mm minimum tabletop to floor distance (No Image Intensifier)

• Focal distance varying from 115 cm. to 150 cm. (with the option of 180 cm)

• ± 40° beam angulation

• Automatic spot film device with identification of all cassette sizes

• Cassette size from 18x24 to 35x43 cm.; division into 1/2/3/4/5 according with the film size.

• Automatic / manual collimator with square and iris limiters

The Remote tilting table has been designed in the way that, during normal use, the
operator can not modify the beam axis position in respect with the centre of the
image receptors integrated into the unit. In particular, once the alignment procedure
is carried out during the installation of the unit, it will remain constant during normal
operation. Such alignment is granted also in case of tube inclination

20 / 671
1 / 16
1.2. SYSTEM COMPOSITION

The Remote-tilting table is composed of

• Rear tower supporting the tilting patient tabletop

• X-Ray tube support

• Automatic Spot Film Device

• Automatic collimator

• Remote console

22 / 671
2 / 16

23 / 671
1.3. ACCESSORIES
The table has common accessory.
As a matter of fact, the unit is delivered with standard accessories that can be replaced only upon
request and with a possible price difference. Additionally, there are few optional accessories that must
be ordered

COMMON ACCESSORIES
1) HANDGRIP
2) INTERNAL HANDGRIP
3) MOTORIZED COMPRESSOR WITH AUTOMATIC PARKING

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
PROVIDED WITH THE UNIT ONLY UPON REQUEST CAN BE REPLACED
WITH THE FOLLOWING
1) AUTOMATIC COLLIMATOR SQUARE IRIS 1) AUTOMATIC COLLIMATOR WITH FILTERS

2) MECHANICAL CONNECTION FOR I.I.OF 9” 2) MECHANICAL CONNECTION FOR I.I. OF


12”
2) MECHANICAL CONNECTION FOR I.I OF 14”
– 16” I.I.

3) CONTROL CONSOLLE 3) GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL

4) FOOR REST 4) CARBON FIBER FOOT REST


5) OVER/UNDER FLOOR PLATE

6) TOOLS KIT FOR TRANSPORT

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1. FLUOROSCOPY/RADIOGRAPY REMOTE EXAM ROOM FOOT PEDALS
2. COLLIMATOR ROTATION FLANGE
3. DAP MEASURE CHAMBER
4. 3 FIELDS CLAYMONT MEASURE CHAMBER
5. COMPRESSION BAND WITH RATCKET
6. INFUSION SUPPORT
7. LEGS SUPPORT
8. ARM SUPPORT
9. TRUNNION RING FOR VARIAN
10. SHOULDERS REST
11. LATERAL CASSETTE SUPPORT 35X43CM
12. JOINTED LATERAL CASETTE 24X30CM
13. TABLE TOP’S MATRESS
14. PAPER ROLL SUPPORT
15. INTERPHONE
16 WEB CAM

24 / 671
3 / 16
1.4. TABLE APPLICATIONS AND INTENDED USE

The Table device, is not classified “INTERVENTIONAL RADIOLOGIC


EQUIPMENT” (rif. CEI EN 60601-2-43).” All procedures that might require prolonged
radioscopic exposures, for which the device can be used, are such to introduce low
stochastic risks of deterministic effects (rif. CEI EN 60601-2-43 – attached BB). See
also §. 1.11

The Table can not be used for:


Dental applications
Cardioangiography
Interventional neuroradiology

The Table is a 90/90 remote tilting, designed for radiographic and fluoroscopic examinations. In
particular Standard procedures
1 Upper GI (gastrointestinal) including oesophagus, barium swallow, upper GI series
and small bowel series
2 Lower GI including barium enema
3 Abdominal including cholangiogram, ERCP (Endoscopic Retrograde
Cholangiopancreatography),
4 IVU (Intravenous Urogram (radiology), Tomography and Cholecystography
5 Genitoureteral including cystogram and hysterosalpingogram
6 Skeletal examinations

• NON vascular interventional


1. Needle biobsies
2. Aspirations
3. Injections
4. Needle localization
5. Lumbar punctures
• Special & vascular procedures

1. Arthography including knee, hip, shoulder, wrist, ankle, and temporomandibular


joint.
2. Chest fluorography
3. Myelography (limited at 20° Trendelenburg angle) including cervical,
thoracic, lumbar spine and discography
• Extra table procedures

1. Chest exposures on external wall bucky


2. Examination on patient laying on a stretcher
3. Exposures with cassettes external to the SFD

26 / 671
4 / 16

27 / 671
1.5. SAFETY

The Remote Tilting table must be used by qualified personnel, in accordance with the safety
instructions contained into this manual and for the sole purposes for which it has been designed.

Because the Table is used in combination with other units, and in case their use compatibility is not
declared in the unit documentation, the operator is responsible to verify that no dangerous situations
may occur for the patients and the personnel.
For this scope it is good practice to contact the manufacturer of such unit or an expert.

The unit must not be used in case of fault of the proper circuits or of fault of the system of which it is a
part. Identically the unit must not be used in case any alarm device of the whole system is faulty.

Any modification at the unit or at its safety circuits must be approved by Mecall srl before it is
introduced on the unit.

The Remote-tilting table, as any other medical device, must be carefully used and needs periodical
maintenance as specified in the technical documentation.

28 / 671
5 / 16
1.6. PROTECTION CLASS

This equipment is not classified as anaesthetic-proof and may ignite inflammable


anaesthetics

The table is classified as follows:

TYPE of protection against electrical contacts CLASS I

GRADE of protection against electrical contacts TYPE B

AGAINST HARMFUL INGRESS OF WATER ORDINARY

CLEANING AND DISINFECTION Please refer to


chapter 13

OPERATION IN PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE FORBIDDEN


ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR OR WITH
OXYGEN OR NITORUS OXIDE

MODE OF OPERATION: FIXED


PERMANENTLY INSTALLED
CONTINOUS OPERATION WITH
INTERMITTENT LOAD

Medical equipment (Directive 93/42 CEE) CLASS IIb

30 / 671
6 / 16

31 / 671
1.7. ELECTRICAL SAFETY

The x-ray system of which Table is a part must not be operated in any situation in which an explosion
hazard may exists.

This equipment is not classified as anaesthetic-proof and may ignite inflammable anaesthetics.

The protection against electrical shocks has been realised grounding all the metal covers of the unit.
Therefore is imperative to check periodically the proper operation of the grounding system of the
examination room in which the Table has been installed.

Flammable agents used for skin cleaning or disinfecting may also produce an explosion hazard.

Be careful that the unit has been switched off and disconnected from mains before carrying out
cleaning or disinfecting operations on the unit.

Be careful not to pour on the system conductive liquids that may filter inside the unit and compromise
functionality and safety

32 / 671
7 / 16
1.8. SAFETY DEVICE FOR CASSETTE INSERTION / REMOVAL

An invisible infrared beam passing just over the cassette tray handle controls the cassette
insertion/removal area in the front side of the Spot Film Device. This device prevents the possibility
that the operator hands or any other object are in the moving area of the cassette tray. Any
interruption of this beam causes the cassette movement to be stopped and the warning message
[LIGHT CELL] to appear in the lower row of the Remote Console display. In this case the operator
must depress the insertion/removal cassette; the cassette will reach its loading position external to
the SFD at low speed.

34 / 671
8 / 16
1.9. SAFETY DEVICE FOR COMPRESSION CONE

The presence of this safety device must not reduce the attention of the operator
when using the compression cone. In fact:
In procedures involving compression of abdomen, the operator must take great care to
avoid hurting the patient (for example ribs) using the compression device.
It is suggested to advise the patient about the effects provoked by the compression
device and about the rapid movement of the compression cone.

The compression cone assembly has been designed with a special mechanism that allows a very fast
removal of the compression cone in case a dangerous situation occurs.
To remove the compression cone the operator must simply operate the safety knee junction of the
compression cone arm as indicated in the following figure:

35 / 671
9 / 16
1.10. EMERGENCY SWITCH

Two emergency switches are located on the Unit control desk and SFD keyboard. Such switches
disable the power circuit of the table. In any dangerous situation, or in case a movement can not be
stopped, the operator must hit immediately one of these switches. The power circuit of the table is
immediately switched off, but all other units will continue to operate normally.
The emergency switch must be re-enabled only if the operator is absolutely sure that the danger
condition has been removed.

If the Table has been switched off using the emergency switch, x-ray exposures can
not be released anymore.
Provide back up devices for use in case the table is malfunction. Provide a back up unit
with fluoroscopic capabilities as necessary (i.e. a surgical C-arm).
THE OPERATOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DAILY CHECK THAT THE EMERGENCY
SWITCHES ARE WORKING PROPERLY.

37 / 671
10 / 16

38 / 671
1.11. COLLISION PROTECTIONS

The remote tilting table is equipped with a software module that prevents the collision possibilities
between the unit and the architectural limits (wall, ceiling and floor).

In addition, in order to achieve a better exploitation of the room space, the movements are
decelerated in proximity of the collision point and the last part of the travel is covered at a low speed.

In collision situation on the console remote and on the console of proximity the LED buttons that allow
escaping from collision situation will start blinking. These indications stay red until the operator has
manually removed the collision situation.

In addition, the most important movements are protected by double level safety circuits. The first level,
when activated, disables the movement while the second level power off the motor driver opening the
protection magnetic switch. The operator can try to resume the normal operation carrying out the
following procedure:

a) Switch the unit OFF.


b) Enable the magnetic switch.
c) Switch-on the unit.

In case this operation does not restore the normal operation of the unit, the operator must call the
Service Organisation and avoid any further action.

To prevent accidental collisions with accidental objects it is a good practice to maintain a clear-area
around the unit as suggested in the following figure.

5200
2400

350

540 4120 540

39 / 671
11 / 16

40 / 671
Do not stand at the rear side of the patient tabletop during scanning movements of the tube
stand/Spot film device, during tube angulation movements, during tabletop lateral movements and
during table tilting.

During tomography procedures be sure that the patient’s arm is supported and secured by the
tomography arm holder support as shown in the following figure.

41 / 671
12 / 16

42 / 671
1.12. PROTECTIONS AGAINST RADIATION HAZARD

X-ray equipments regulations must be scrupulously complied in order to avoid patients


and equipment user hazard.

The Remote Tilting table allows, in normal operation, the operator to release exposures from a
controlled area and it is classified according with IEC601-1-3 as intended for TYPE B applications. In
this case the primary shield must be designed in such a way that the Kerma in air never exceeds 150
µG per hour.

Only for special diagnostic purpose, like non vascular IVR and peripheral and abdominal DSA, the
exposure can be released from a fluoro/exposure footswitch assembly located into the examination
room. Refer to the following room layout for identification of significant zone of occupancy:

700 700
1500

1100

3800

It is also suggested that proper intercom systems be installed in the examination room in order to
simplify the communication between the patient and the operator.

It is responsibility of the customer to provide the installation of such a screen in the way that personnel
could be protected against radiation and could have a large view of the patient and of the examination
room.
During exposures, all the personnel not involved in the operation of the equipment must leave the
examination room or stay behind the protective screens.

In order to protect the patients, the user and any other person against radiation hazard, the
regulations for operating X-rays equipment should be scrupulously complied with it.

43 / 671
13 / 16
KEEP THE DISTANCE FROM X-RAY SOURCE

The dose diminishes by the square of the distance; i.e. at a double distance the dose is 1/4 and at a
triple distance the dose is 1/9.

KEEP SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES.

The dose increases according to the exposure time; (i.e. half exposure time gives half the
dose). In radiography the exposure value is given in mAs.

WEAR ANTI-X APRONS

The protection value exponentially increases with the thickness of the protection. I.e. a double
equivalent protective thickness reduces dose at 1/4; a triple equivalent protective thickness reduces
dose to 1/9.

DO NOT GET EXPOSED TO DIRECT RADIATION.

The dose resulting from a direct radiation is approximately 100 times the dose of a secondary
radiation. Exposures are generally made standing behind protective shields. For exposures near
genitals, assure the most appropriate protection of gonads and ovaries. Persons that stand near the
patients during examinations should wear anti-x aprons. This is also valid for Service Personnel. In
case of activity in controlled areas, always wear the personal dosimeter.

During beam incidence it is possible that the size of the irradiated area automatically set
by the collimator is greater than the Image receptor size.
In this case the size of the irradiated area is automatically corrected to limit at the
maximum the irradiated area exceeding the receptor’s size.
The operator, under his responsibility, can still reduce the size of the irradiated area
enabling the automatic collimator manual mode. The reduction will remain valid during
beam angulation until the irradiated area will not exceed the useful size of the image
receptor.

Procedures for which the operator must operate close to the patient require the additional
use of individual radiation protection devices.
In the following tables have been detailed the size of the occupancy areas with the
related levels of the leakage radiation.
It is under the operator’s responsibility to make available and use the protection devices
necessary to comply IEC 601-1-1: 1994 regulation.

45 / 671
14 / 16

46 / 671
Tab.209
RULE REQUIRED VALUES
PATIENT’S SUPPORT POSITION HEIGHT IN THE USEFUL MAXIMUM VALUE OF KERMA
OCCUPANCY AREA [cm] IN AIR PER HOUR
[mGy]
HORIZZONTAL OR VERTICAL 0-40 1,5
HORIZONTAL 40-200 0,15
VERTICAL 40-170 0,15

VALUES MEASURED WITHOUT PROTECTION

47 / 671
Focal spot
125 KvP 15 / 16

180cm

16cm

Table top

87cm
Floor

phantom 25x25x16 cm
Beam axis

Table top

50c

Measuring chamber Zone of occupancy

48 / 671
1.13. PROTECTIONS AGAINST EXPLOSION HAZARD

This equipment is not classified as anaesthetic-proof and may ignite inflammable anaesthetics.
Flammable agents used for skin cleaning or disinfecting may also provoke an explosion hazard.

1.14. RESIDUAL RISKS & ACCIDENT HAZARD

The following topics regard aspects of safety for the patient and/or operator.

The Remote-tilting table has been designed conforming to safety principles. Anyway residual risks
may still exist during the use of the unit, especially as far as improper use of the unit is concerned. To
limit to the minimum all residual risks the following rules should be observed:

1. For safety reasons, the operator shall not set the unit into operation unless he is sure
that neither the patient nor any other person is exposed to hazards due to the
operation of the unit.
2. Always use shoulder rest and handgrips for patient safety
3. Be sure that any mechanical movements of the tabletop or associated components
will not injure the patient’s extremities. In particular be sure that the patient's hands
are insight at all times and do not extend around the sides or ends of the tabletop. A
good way to avoid injury to the patient’s hands is to have the patient using the
handgrips.
4. In procedures involving compression of abdomen, the operator must take great care
to avoid hurting the patient (for example ribs) using the compression device.
5. A special attention should be paid while tilting the table as collisions could happen
with chairs, small tables mounted on casters, film-changer etc.
6. The extreme stop limit positions of the column/SFD assembly may be the cause of
finger trapping conditions between the spot film device and supports of the tabletop
lateral movement.
7. With the patient seated, the longitudinal displacement of the column may cause the
collision between the head of the patient and the X-ray tube/collimator assembly or
with the compression device when this one is in working position.
8. The mechanical relationship between the tomographic bar and the column could
provoke fracture hazard. The hands of the patient and of the operator are in danger,
especially in case of change of layer height.
9. When the column reaches its maximum inclination towards head side and the
compressor is in the parking position there is a collision hazard with the inner hand
grip which is normally inserted in the accessory guide.
10. Before starting any operation, it is suggested to advice the patient about the effects
given by the compression device and about the rapid movement of the compression
cone.
11. The patient must hold the contrast media glass from its support using always the left
hand to avoid to interfere with the compression cone movement from / to the parking
position

49 / 671
16 / 16

50 / 671
2. TECHNICAL DATA

The Exam room must be in compliance with the IEC standards

POWER
Generator Type 50 kW
Nominal line frequency 50 – 60 Hz
Nominal line voltage 400V Three phase
Line voltage tolerance ± 10 %
Sloping Power source @ 400V 0.13 Ω
Line input reactive power 75 KVA
Line input reactive power 63 KW
External safety device 63A automatic switch

Generator Type 65 kW
Nominal line frequency 50 – 60 Hz
Nominal line voltage 400V three phase
Line voltage tollerance ± 10 %
Power source impedence @ 400V 0.13 Ω
Line input reactive power 98 KVA
Line input active power 82 KW
External safety device 63A automatic switch

Generator Type 80 kW
Nominal line frequency 50 – 60 Hz
Nominal line voltage 400V three phase
Line voltage tollerance ± 10 %
Power source impedence @ 400V 0.13 Ω
Line input reactive power 120 KVA
Line input active power 100 KW
External safety device 63A automatic switch

HEAT DISSIPATION
Console Approx. 500 kcal/h
Generator cabinet Approx. 930 kcal/h
Tilting unit Approx. 1.000 kcal/h

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT


The remote tilting table is shipped according with the packaging list included in each single shipment.
Unit weight Kg. 1.300
Over floor base plate Kg. 180
Under floor base plate Kg. 80

51 / 671
1 / 16

52 / 671
2.1. WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS

The GENERATORS power circuits are contained into a metal cabinet having the
following weight and dimensions:

DEIMOS CABINET

BASE Height Weight

Cabinet with H.V. 55 x 45 cm. 130 cm 100 kg.


transformer

CASTOR R/F CABINET

BASE Height Weight

Cabinet with H.V. 50 x 38 cm. 92 cm 66 kg.


transformer

CASTOR HF CABINET

BASE Height Weight

Cabinet with H.V. 55 x 42 cm. 195 cm 170 kg.


transformer

The unit dimensions are shown by the following figure:

53 / 671
2 / 16

54 / 671
255 1950

3005

412,5 1620
2460

55 / 671
3 / 16
MINIMUM TABLE -TOP/FLOOR DISTANCES
9" HIRIS A plus TH9438 720
9" HIRIS T plus TH9438 720
9" TH9428 CD100 620
9" TH9428 ESI CD 720
9" TH9428 CD1000 720
12" HIRIS A plus TH9432 820
12" HIRIS T plus TH9432 820
12" TH9432 CD100 720
12" TH9432 ESI CD 820
MAX1320

12" TH9432 CD1000 820


14" HIRIS TH 9435 820
16" HIRIS A plus TH9447 870
16" HIRIS T plus TH9447 870
16" TH9447 ESI CD 870

56 / 671
4 / 16

57 / 671
2100

350 (650)
119 DISTANCE I.I. / PANEL

84 DISTANCE FILM / PANEL


MIN F.D. 1150
5 / 16

MAX F.D. 1500 (OPT. F.D.1800)

58 / 671
2525

2115
327,5
495
MAX 535
MIN 235
MAX.2065

150
522
732

150

2345 PANEL RADIO TRASPARENT AREA

2435

59 / 671
6 / 16
2.2. TABLE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE
Dimensions 2435 mm. X 732 mm.
Radio transparent area 2345 mm. X 522 mm
Max.patient’s weight (IEC 601-1)180 kg.
Carbon fiber tabletop filtration 0.7 mm. Al.
Tabletop minimum height 520 mm (No Image Intensifier)
Tabletop vertical travel 780 mm
Tabletop –film distance 84 mm.
Tabletop – Image Intensifier distance 119 mm.
Lateral travel ± 150 mm.
Transversal travel speed Stepless from 0 to 30 mm/s
Max. tabletop rear access distance Max 535 mm.
Max. angle of trendelenburg -90°
Max. angle of tilting° +90
Tilting speed 4,5 °/s

X-RAY TUBE COLUMN


Longitudinal travel (tube only) 1950 mm
Longitudinal travel with SFD 1620 mm
Useful radiography area 2050 x 822 mm
X-ray tube column longitudinal speed Stepless from 0 to 150 mm/s
Beam inclination ± 40 °
Focus / Film distance min1150 mm
Focus / Film distance max1500 mm (optional 1800)
FFD movement speed 35 mm/s.
Beam/floor min. distance (tilt=+90) 327,5 mm
Beam/floor max. distance (tilt=+90) 2115 mm
Beam/table edge min. Distance 255 mm
X-Ray tube rotation with 90° detents° ± 180

COMPRESSION CONE
Travel range (in field). 26 cm
Incidence operative range ±20° or ±5° from starting angle
Max. compression force 10.0 kg.

SPOT FILM DEVICE


Cassette formats (millimetre and inches) From 18X24 to 35x43
Vertical division (all formats) 1–2
Vertical division (film ε 24 format) 1–2–3
Vertical division (film ε 30 format) 1 – 2– 3– 4
Vertical division (40 and 43 formats) 1 – 2– 3– 4 –5
Rapid sequence maximum speed 2 Exp/s
Fluoroscopy to Radiography change over 0.6 s.
time
Radiography and tomography possible on yes
the same film
Full SFD indications available on the control yes
desk
Predisposition for AEC yes
Type of grid Fixed

60 / 671
7 / 16
Grid material Carbon fiber
Grid Ratio 12:1
Grid Focalization 130 cm
Grid Lines 80 l/cm
Operative Modes radio/tomo rapid sequence
Longitudinal travel (column centered) 1620 mm. (±5°)
Shutters/film distance 40 mm.
Hazards protections Optical detector; warning label

COLLIMATOR
Maximum kV 150 kVp
Square field coverage at FFD=110cm 43 X 35 cm (both direction)
Operative FFD 115 ÷ 180 cm
Minimum collimation area (IEC 601-1-3) < 5 x 5 cm (in image plane)
Inherent filtration (IEC 601-1-3) > 1.7 mm al/eq
Leakage radiation (IEC 601-1-3)< 1 mGy/h (tubes certified)
Removable additional filter 0.1mm Cu + 1.0 mm Al
0.2mm Cu + 1.0 mm Al

Collimator lamp (IEC 601-1-3) 24v ac / 150w


Average illumination > 160 lx ffd=100 cm
Light field edge contrast ratio > 4 FFD = 100 cm
Light field vs x-ray field accuracy < 1.8% FFD
X-ray field vs film size accuracy < 2.8% FFD
Scale vs x-ray field accuracy < 1.8% FFD
Sid indication accuracy < 1.8% FFD

TOMOGRAPHY
Tomography type Parallel plane tomography
Focus / film distance 1150 mm
Angles 8° - 20° - 30° - 40°
Tomo Exposure times 8° = 0,4 s
20° = 1,0 s
30° = 1,5 s
40° = 2,0 s
Fulcrum adjustment 0 - 300 mm
Adjustment step ± 1 mm
Fulcrum automatic increment/decrement
sequences.

62 / 671
8 / 16

63 / 671
2.3. MINIMUM TABLETOP HEIGHT AS FUNCTION OF THE IMAGE SYSTEM
MODEL

9” HIRIS A plus TH9438 720


9” HIRIS T plus TH9438 720
9” TH9428 CD100 620
9” TH9428 ESI CD 720
9” TH9428 CD1000 720
12” HIRIS A plus TH9432 820
12” HIRIS T plus TH9432 820
12” TH9432 CD100 720
12” TH9432 ESI CD 820
12” TH9432 CD1000 820
14” HIRIS TH9435 820
16” HIRIS A plus TH9447 870
16” HIRIS T plus TH9447 870
16” TH9447 ESI CD 870

64 / 671
9 / 16
2.4. CASTOR GENERATORS PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

CASTOR R/F 50 – PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Nominal tube voltage From 40 to 150 kV in 1kV step


Maximum tube current 630 mA @ 80kV
Maximum output power 50 kW (100 kV, 500 mA, 0,1 sec)
or (80 kV, 630 mA, 0,1 sec)
Minimum mAs value 0.4 mAs (200 mA, 0.002 sec)
Maximum mAs value 600 mAs (Hardaware limit)
Range of loading factors ( mA) 10 - 13 - 16 - 20 - 25 - 32 - 40 50 -
63 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 -250
- 320 - 400 - 500 - 630
Minimum exposure time 0,001 S
Maximum exposure time 6,00 S
Minimum exposure time with AEC 0,002 S
Fluoroscopy voltage From 40 to 120 kV in 1kV step
Fluoroscopy current From 0,1 to 8 mA
Maximum exposure rate 50 fr/s

CASTOR R/F 65 – PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Nominal tube voltage From 40 to 150 kV in 1kV step


Maximum tube current 800 mA @ 81kV
Maximum output power 65 kW (81 kV, 800 mA, 0,1 sec) or
(103 kV, 630 mA, 0,1 sec)
Minimum mAs value 0.4 mAs (200 mA, 0.002 sec)
Maximum mAs value 600 mAs (Hardaware limit)
Range of loading factors ( mA) 10 - 13 - 16 - 20 - 25 - 32 - 40 50 -
63 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 -250
- 320 - 400 - 500 – 630 - 800
Minimum exposure time 0,001 S
Maximum exposure time 6,00 S
Minimum exposure time with AEC 0,002 S
Fluoroscopy voltage From 40 to 120 kV in 1kV step
Fluoroscopy current From 0,1 to 8 mA
Maximum exposure rate 50 fr/s

66 / 671
10 / 16

67 / 671
CASTOR HF 80 – PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Nominal tube voltage From 40 to 150 kV in 1kV step


Maximum tube current 1000 mA @ 80kV
Maximum output power 80 kW (81 kV, 1000 mA, 0,1 sec)
or (100 kV, 800 mA, 0,1 sec)
Minimum mAs value 0.4 mAs (200 mA, 0.002 sec)
Maximum mAs value 600 mAs (Hardaware limit)
Range of loading factors ( mA) 10 - 13 - 16 - 20 - 25 - 32 - 40 50 -
63 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 -250
- 320 - 400 - 500 – 630 – 800 -
1000
Minimum exposure time 0,001 S
Maximum exposure time 6,00 S
Minimum exposure time with AEC 0,002 S
Fluoroscopy voltage From 40 to 120 kV in 1kV step
Fluoroscopy current From 0,1 to 8 mA
Maximum exposure rate 50 fr/s

68 / 671
11 / 16
2.5. DEIMOS GENERATORS PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

DEIMOS 65 - 65 kW– PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Nominal tube voltage From 40 to 150 kV in 1 kV step


Tube current From 10 to 800 mA
Maximum output power 65 kW (103 kV, 630 mA ) or
(81 kV, 800 mA )
Minimum mAs value 0.5 mAs (200 mA, 0.002 sec)
Maximum mAs value 1.000 mAs (Tube dependent)
mA range From 10 to 800 mA in 20 steps
10, 12,5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,
80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400,
500, 630, 800 mA
Exposure time range From 1.0 to 6300 ms in 39 steps
1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0,
6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20, 25, 32,
40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200,
250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1.000,
1.250, 1.600, 2.000, 2.500,3.200,
4.000, 5.000, 6.300 ms

DEIMOS 80 - 80 kW– PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Nominal tube voltage From 40 to 150 kV in 1 kV step


Tube current From 10 to 1000 mA
Maximum output power 80 kW (100 kV, 800 mA ) or
(80 kV, 1000 mA )
Minimum mAs value 0.5 mAs (200 mA, 0.002 sec)
Maximum mAs value 1.000 mAs (Tube dependent)
mA range From 10 to 1000 mA in 21 steps
10, 12,5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,
80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400,
500, 630, 800, 1000 mA
Exposure time range From 1.0 to 6300 ms in 39 steps
1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0,
6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20, 25, 32,
40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200,
250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1.000,
1.250, 1.600, 2.000, 2.500,3.200,
4.000, 5.000, 6.300 ms

70 / 671
12 / 16

71 / 671
2.6. REGULATIONS COMPLIANCE

The remote tilting table is classified as:

MEDICAL EQUIPMENT CLASS IIb (Directive 93/42 CEE).

The CLSIS EXEL has been designed to comply with the following regulations:

EN 60601-1 An. 1, An. 2


EN 60601-1-1 An. 1
EN 60601-1-2
EN 60601-1-3
EN 60601-1-4
EN 60601-2-7
EN 60601-2-28
EN 60601-2-32

THE REMOTE TILTING TABLE IS CERTIFIED CE (0051).

72 / 671
13 / 16
2.7. COMPATIBILITY WITH OTHER ACCESSORIES

THE X-RAY TUBE AND THE RECEPTOR SUPPORTS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED IN
ORDER TO WITHSTAND THE ACCESSORIES LISTED IN THIS SECTION.
DO NOT ADD OTHER COMPONENTS THAT INCREASE THE MECHANICAL
STRESS OF THE SUPPORTS. CONTACT MECALL SUPPPORT IN CASE OF
TUBE/TUBE HOUSING COMBINATIONS NOT PREVIOUSLY LISTED

The remote tilting table has been designed and tested in order to fully comply with the regulations
specified in section 2.6 when connected with the following radiological subsystems:

X-RAY TUBES AND TUBE HOUSING

Varian Housing All tubes in B130


All tubes in DIAMOND Housing
All tubes in SAPPHIRE Housing

Dunlee Housing All tubes in PX1400


Mecall All tubes in C52 Super Housing

X-RAY GENERATORS
Mecall CASTOR HF
Mecall CASTOR R/F
Mecall DEIMOS

IMAGE SYSTEMS

IB INFIMED
IB ATS

73 / 671
14 / 16

74 / 671
2.8. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The unit complies with the standard EN 60601-1-1:2001 + A1:2006 “Medical electrical equipment –
Part 1-2: General requirements for safety – Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic compatibility –
Requirements and tests”
The device standard EN 60601-1-2:2001 refers to the following regulations:

STANDARD DATE TITLE


EN 55011 1998 Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment.
A1 1999 Radio disturbance characteristics – limits and methods of
A2 2002 measurement
EN 55014-1 2006 Electromagnetic compatibility – Requirements for household
appliance, electric tools and similar apparatus. Part 1: Emission –
Product family standard
EN 61000-3-2 2000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 3: Limits
A2 2005 Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emission (equipment input
current ≤ 16 A per phase)
EN 61000-3-3 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 3: Limits
A1 2001 Section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-
A2 2005 voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current ≤ 16 A
EN 61000-4-2 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 1998 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
A2 2001 Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test – Basic EMC
Publication
EN 61000-4-3 1996 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 1998 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
A2 2001 Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field
immunity test - Basic EMC Publication
EN 61000-4-4 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 2001 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
A2 2001 Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test - Basic EMC
Publication
EN 61000-4-5 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 2001 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
Section 5: Surge immunity test - Basic EMC Publication
EN 61000-4-6 1996 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 2001 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
Section 6: Immunity to conducting disturbances, induced by
radiofrequency fields - Basic EMC Publication
EN 61000-4-8 1993 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 2001 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
Section 8: Power frequency magnetic fields immunity test
EN 61000-4-11 1994 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A1 2001 Part 4: Testing and measuring techniques
Section 11: Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
immunity tests - Basic EMC Publication

Note: according with Annex of EN 60601-1-2 + A1:2006 all references are made to the latest edition
of the related publications.

75 / 671
15 / 16
77 / 671
16 / 16
3 UNIT IDENTIFICATION

3.1 IDENTIFICATION & WARNING LABELS

The Unit is identified by a series of adhesive labels placed on the unit.


These labels (figure below) are applied to identify the product from a commercial point of view and to
meet the requirements of the standards currently in force. Besides the brand mark, the company’s
address and the manufacturer, the identification label includes the following information:

1. Model
2. serial number and production lot number
3. the date of production (month and year)
4. rated voltage, number of phases, absorbed current and mains frequency

Please make reference to the following figures to identify the unit:

78 / 671
1/3
LINE MAIN SWITCH

79 / 671
2 / 3
3 / 3
80 / 671
4. STORAGE AND USE

This equipment is not classified as anaesthetic-proof and may ignite inflammable


anaesthetic.

4.1. PACKING

The unit is supplied according with the shipping documents delivered with each unit.

4.2. STORAGE CONDITIONS

STORAGE TEMPERATURE from -5°C to +60°C

STORAGE HUMIDITY 80% non condensing

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 500 ÷ 1060 hPa

4.3. USE CONDITIONS

ENVIRONMENT TEMPERATURE from +15°C to +40°C

ENVIRONMENT HUMIDITY 80% non condensino

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 500 ÷ 1060 hPa

81 / 671
Page:
1/1
5. ROOM PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS
5.1. INTRODUCTION

The remote tilting table can be installed in a room that has been officially approved for the
operation of radiological equipment of the same class.

In addition, proper operation of the unit can be achieved only if the environmental
characteristics specified in the following sections are strictly observed.

ENSURE THAT THE CONSTRUCTION AND LOAD CAPABILITY OF THE


FLOOR ARE SUFFICIENT FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT.
ENSURE THAT THE CENTRAL GROUND TERMINAL OF THE ROOM HAS A
RESISTANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS IN FORCE.
ENSURE THAT THE ROOM LINE INPUT IS PROTECTED BY MEANS OF A
DIFFERENTIAL BREAKER CALIBRATED FOR A MAXIMUM LEAKAGE
CURRENT OF 30mA.
ENSURE THAT THE ROOM EMERGENCY CIRCUIT IS PRESENT AND
DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS IN FORCE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING MAY CAUSE SERIOUS OR
FATAL BODILY INJURY AND DEGRADE THE UNIT SAFETY LEVEL

5.2. ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION

In order to properly install the remote tilting table, the use of special accessories for the
installation might be necessary. The accessories to be used depend on the room
constructions and should be ordered before the installation starts.

Unit installation dollies Mecall p/n XSAB03


Unit over floor installation plate Mecall p/n XSAB01
Unit under floor installation plate Mecall p/n XSAB02
Unit tube arm self locking nut fixation tool Mecall p/n ATTR049

83 / 671
1 / 20
5.3. ROOM REQUIREMENTS

The unit has been designed to operate in a room respecting the following
environmental conditions:

Environment temperature from +15°C to +40°C

Environment humidity 80% non condensing

In addition to the above, the following rules must be observed:

1. The construction and load capability of the ceiling are sufficient for the installation of
the unit.

2. The floor is level or can be compensated.

3. Precautionary measures have been taken to prevent scatter radiation from entering
other rooms and/or hallways and that all exposed walls are lead-lined.
In particular the Hospital physicians should approve the room layout before the
installation starts.

4. Sufficient consideration has been given to the room layout with respect to minimum
clearances between walls and the equipment as specified in the unit manual.

5. Carefully evaluate the best fixation system to be use for the ceiling rails as described
in the following layout example.

6. It is a good practice to install an intercom system to ease the communication


between the patient and the medical staff.

85 / 671
2 / 20
WARNING: ROOM HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS

The minimum allowed room height, with standard 20 mm base spacer is 2600
mm as shown in the following figure.
In case the unit must be installed using a different base spacer, the room
minimum height requirement must be increased of the same quantity.

87 / 671
2525

495

327,5
3 / 20

2115

88 / 671
A typical room layout could be the following one:

4 / 20
4850
LEGEND:
1. CLISIS 90/90 TABLE

250minimum
2350 2. GENERATOR POWER CABINET
3. CLISIS OPERATIVE LIMIT
4. CONTROL DESK TABLE
8 2 5. CLISIS CONSOLE
6. ROOM POWER ELECTRICAL BOARD
7. ANTI-X GLASS 1200x800 (suggested)
8. 18" LCD MONITOR ON TROLLEY
3
9. DIGITAL SYSTEM

4850
1 7
DOOR MICROSWITCH

RADIATION HAZARD LAMP


4 9
ROOM EMERGENCY SWITCH H=1700mm

SP.

5
Modifche

Re v D at a descrizione modifica Firm a


6 scala Denominazione
offerta:
CLISIS EXEL del:
data INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
f i rm a
vi s t o (LAYOUT )
°
dis eg no n Rev
Via Negrelli, 55 LISSONE (ITALY)
Tel.(039)483.249-484.884-464.841 Fax 039/464819

4850
6mm thickness
removable floor cover.
2810
"A" Detail
FLOOR LEVEL
200
460

Cabl e exit
80

f or cabi net
Cable exit for
Clisis Exel 150

Ethernet socket (RJ45) to the


Totally inspectionable
4850

Under Floor conduit. "Data switch/hub"


("A" Detail)
10A mains socket located at
20cm from the floor

N°2 WIRES Ø 1.0 TO ROOM ELECTRICAL BOARD

N°4 WIRES Ø 1.0 TO ROOM ELECTRICAL BOARD

Cable exit for


SERIES WI RED TO ROOM ELECTRICAL BOARD
Console and
SP. N°2 Digital System.
Modifche

Cables exit for room Rev Data descrizione modifica Fi rm a


power electrical board. scala Denominazione
offerta:
N°1 Ø80 tube in wall or CLISIS EXEL del:
external canalization. data INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
fi rm a
( C ABLE C O N D U IT )
vi s t o
°
disegno n Rev
Via Negrelli, 55 LISSONE (ITALY)
Tel.(039)483.249-484.884-464.841 Fax 039/464819

89 / 671
n°8 CLISIS EXEL
BASE FIXATION
Clisis Exel Support Area.
Floor coating free zone.
UNDERFLOOR PLATE
1600 10

Floor coating
free zone.

B
n°8 UNIT WEIGHT = 1300Kg
M12 HOLES LOADING AREA = 2.60mq
1600

A PLATE WEIGHT = 80Kg


A FLOOR LOADING = 500Kg/mq

CLISIS EXEL BASE FIXATION


Floor coating Room floor 50 1
Room floor
coating free zone. coating 2 4

0
1
3
5
FLOOR

0
1
sez. A - A Clisis Exel underfloor plate at
floor level fixed and covered
with the same floor material. 1 - N°1 SCREW TCCE UNI5931 CL8.8 M12X35
1 2 - N°1 SPRING WASHER Ø 12
2 3 3 - N°2 PLAIN WASHER Ø 12
(B) 4 - CLISIS EXEL BASE
5 - UNDER FLOOR PLATE
1 - N°1 SCREW TSCE UNI5933 CL10.9 M12X90
2 - N°1 WASHER Ø i 10.25 Ø e 30 5p.7 sv.90°
4 3 - UNDER FLOOR PLATE
4 - N°1 BOSS FISCHER SLM 12

90 / 671
5 / 20
1700
85 605 220 605
OVERFLOOR PLATE
50
12

50
Clisis Exel UNIT WEIGHT = 1300Kg
Base PLATE WEIGHT = 180Kg
TOTAL LOAD = 1480Kg
LOADING AREA = 1.90mq
1100
1000

n°8 - M12 HOLES


FLOOR LOADING = 780Kg/mq
n°8 CLISIS EXEL BOLTS M12x100 CL 8.8
BASE FIXATION
n°8 - Ø15 HOLES
"SLM12" ANCHORS - FISCHER

n°8 FLOOR FIXATION


50 1600

OVER FLOOR PLATE FIXATION CLISIS EXEL BASE FIXATION


1 1
3 2
2 4

10
3
FLOOR 5
12

FLOOR

12
NB: IF CONCRETE IS
4 CLASS Rc > 25N/mm
1 - N°1 SCREW TCCE UNI5931 CL8.8 M12X35
2 - N°1 SPRING WASHER Ø 12
1 - N°1 SCREW TSCE UNI5933 CL10.9 M12X90
3 - N°2 PLAIN WASHER Ø 12
2 - N°1 WASHER Ø i 10.25 Ø e 30 5p.7 sv.90°
4 - CLISIS EXEL BASE
3 - OVER FLOOR PLATE
5 - OVER FLOOR PLATE
4 - N°1 BOSS FISCHER SLM 12

91 / 671
6 / 20
5.4. SYSTEM CABLES

The remote tilting table must be completed with a special set of cables that allows the
proper operation of the additional accessories.
Because each installation has its own typical layout, in this section are detailed the lengths
of the standard cables supplied with the systems, showing also the correct way to route the
cables.
In case during the design of the room layout, it is necessary to modify the standard length
of a group of cables, it is responsibility of the installer to clearly specify this configuration
change.
In this section has been also added the system interconnection diagrams for the most
complete configuration supported by the table. Such drawings show all physical
connections between the internal parts of the remote tilting table and the system itself with
other accessories.
For additional information the installer must refer to section 7 of this manual.

Before starting the installation, it is necessary for the installer verify that all
accessories or interface cables are present and delivered in the lengths
defined during the room layout design phase.

92 / 671
7 / 20
5.5. BASE PLATE INSTALLATION

The remote tilting table must be fixed to the floor using three different
methods: Direct fixation of the unit base to the floor

This fixation method is allowed when the floor loading capability is greater than 2170
kg/m2 (unit weight = 1300 Kg; patient weight= 180 Kg; loading area = 0,60 m2) and the
fixation must be done as detailed in the following figure:

94 / 671
1269 CLISIS EXEL
8 / 20
BASE FIXATION
n°8 Ø15 HOLES for
CLISIS EXEL BASE FIXATION (W/O PLATE)

LOADING AREA = 0.60mq


Clisis Exel UNIT WEIGHT = 1300Kg
464

Base
MAXIMUM LOAD ON BOLTS = 300Kg
FLOOR LOADING = 2170Kg/mq

1
3
2

FLOOR
10

NB: IF CONCRETE IS
4 CLASS Rc > 25N/mm

1 - N°1 SCREW TSCE UNI5933 CL10.9 M12X90


2 - N°1 WASHER Ø i 10.25 Ø e 30 5p.7 sv.90°
3 - CLISIS EXEL BASE
4 - N°1 BOSS FISCHER SLM 12

Before starting the installation, it is necessary for the installer verify that all
accessories or interface cables are present and delivered in the lengths defined
during the room layout design phase.

It is responsibility of the installer to select the fixation method that grants the
correct unit anchoring in function of the constructive characteristics of the floor
itself.

95 / 671
Use of the under floor installation plate p/n XSAB02

In case the load capability of the floor is lower than 2300 kg/m2 it is possible to use the
optional load distribution base p/n XSAB02 that must be ordered with the unit. With this
base the floor loading capability must be greater than 620 kg/m2 ( unit weight = 1300 Kg;
patient weight= 180 Kg; loading area = 2,60 m2). In order to correctly the base plate the
installer will be responsible to:

1. Remove the upper part of the floor for a minimum area of 2200 x 1700 mm:
2. Make sure that the floor surface on the bottom side of the base plate is rugged
enough to grant a proper grip of the concrete.
3. Make sure that the base plate is accurately leveled with the upper plate aligned
with the finished surface of the floor as detailed in the following drawing.
4. If required, fix the base plate to the floor using M12 screws as detailed in the
following drawing;
5. Insert M12 screws in the unit fixation holes to prevent the possibility that the
concrete could obstruct the eight unit fixation holes.
6. Pour the concrete with a ration between cement and sand in a 1:2.5 ratio.

96 / 671
Clisis Exel Support Area.
n°8 CLISIS EXEL
BASE FIXATION Floor coating free zone. UNDERFLOOR PLATE
9 / 20
1600 10

Floor coating
free zone.

B
n°8 UNIT WEIGHT = 1300Kg
M12 HOLES LOADING AREA = 2.60mq
1600

A PLATE WEIGHT = 80Kg


A FLOOR LOADING = 500Kg/mq

CLISIS EXEL BASE FIXATION


Floor coating Room floor 50 1
Room floor
coating free zone. coating 2 4

10
3
5
FLOOR

10
sez. A - A Clisis Exel underfloor plate at
floor level fixed and covered
with the same floor material. 1 - N°1 SCREW TCCE UNI5931 CL8.8 M12X35
1 2 - N°1 SPRING WASHER Ø 12
2 3 3 - N°2 PLAIN WASHER Ø 12
(B) 4 - CLISIS EXEL BASE
5 - UNDER FLOOR PLATE
1 - N°1 SCREW TSCE UNI5933 CL10.9 M12X90
2 - N°1 WASHER Ø i 10.25 Ø e 30 5p.7 sv.90°
4 3 - UNDER FLOOR PLATE
4 - N°1 BOSS FISCHER SLM 12

97 / 671
Use of the over floor installation plate p/n XSAB01

This fixation method is recommended when the floor depth is not enough to allow the
installation of the under floor installation plate and/or the floor of the room is not strong
enough to bear the entire system weight laying on the table base. In this case the installer
must use the optional over floor installation plate p/n XSAB01 to distribute the weight on a
larger surface and to offer a better and easier fixation to the floor as detailed in the
following figure:

98 / 671
It is responsibility of the installer to grant the correct anchoring of10the
/ 20 base plate
in function of the constructive characteristics of the floor itself.

1700
85 605 220 605
OVERFLOOR PLATE
50
12
50

Clisis Exel UNIT WEIGHT = 1300Kg


Base
PLATE WEIGHT = 180Kg
TOTAL LOAD = 1480Kg
LOADING AREA = 1.90mq
1100
1000

n°8 - M12 HOLES


FLOOR LOADING = 780Kg/mq
n°8 CLISIS EXEL BOLTS M12x100 CL 8.8
BASE FIXATION
"SLM12" ANCHORS - FISCHER
n°8 - Ø15 HOLES

n°8 FLOOR FIXATION


50 1600

OVER FLOOR PLATE FIXATION CLISIS EXEL BASE FIXATION


1 1
3
2 2 4 10
3
FLOOR 5
12

FLOOR

NB: IF CONCRETE IS
12

4 CLASS Rc > 25N/mm


1 - N°1 SCREW TCCE UNI5931 CL8.8 M12X35
2 - N°1 SPRING WASHER Ø 12
1 - N°1 SCREW TSCE UNI5933 CL10.9 M12X90
3 - N°2 PLAIN WASHER Ø 12
2 - N°1 WASHER Ø i 10.25 Ø e 30 5p.7 sv.90° 4 - CLISIS EXEL BASE
3 - OVER FLOOR PLATE 5 - OVER FLOOR PLATE
4 - N°1 BOSS FISCHER SLM 12

99 / 671
5.6. SYSTEM GROUNDING

All the control electronics of the remote tilting table has the 0V grounded.
It is consequently clear that a grounding error in the installation or a ground connection
made with a cable of inadequate section may degrade both reliability and safety level of
the unit.

The following rules must be observed for a correct grounding:

1. Check that the central ground terminal in the examination room has the
characteristics specified in the safety norms of the country. In particular a ground
resistance lower than 2 Ω is suggested.

2. Connect the central ground terminal directly to the central ground terminal of the
power distribution box by means of a 4 mm2 singe conductor if the distance is less
than 10 m. The cable section must be increased proportionally in case of higher
distances.

3. Connect all ground internal cables only to the central ground terminal of the unit
located in the upper side of the power cabinet as shown in the following figure. Make
sure that the brass fixation screws has been properly tightened

4. Do not add other ground connections that might involve sections of the system, in
order to avoid the possibility to cause ground loops.

100 / 671
11 / 20

101 / 671
5.7. NPUT LINE AND EMERGENCY CIRCUIT

The remote tilting table requires the connection to a single-phase line with the following
characteristics:

STANDARD INSULATION TRANSFORMER

Line Voltage 380 / 400V 3-phase


Line Voltage tolerance ± 10 % ( absolute max. rating )
Line frequency 50 Hz – 60 Hz
Line frequency tolerance ±2%
Stand-by power 600 VA
Peak power 4.000 VA

The standard configuration of the units includes the 380 / 400V 3-phase insulation
transformer. In case the line voltage is different from the standard one, the installer refer to
section 5.8 for further information.

If possible, it is also a good norm to apply the following rules for the line connection:

1. The input line must be totally independent from any other lines that might create
interference.
2. The main line cable is laid in conduit separate from the cable conduit.
3. The section of the line cables must be minimum 4.0 mm.
4. In case the input line characteristics does not match the requirements it is a good
practice to install a line conditioner.

The input line cable must be connected at the power cabinet


line terminals, as detailed in the following figures.

102 / 671
12 / 20
The line voltage selection can be achieved by modifying the wiring of the insulation
transformer and of the auxiliary transformer as shown in the figure:

103 / 671
13 / 20
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER:
The table line input must be protected by means of a safety switch,
calibrated for a maximum leakage current of 30 mA.

The unit can be disconnected from the input line turning in OFF position the line switch
mounted on the front panel of the power cabinet as shown in the following figure:

The room power distribution box must be designed not only to meet the technical
requirements previously specified but also to comply with the requirements of the x-ray
generator and of the image processor (for more details see the related service
documentation). In particular, the general requirements of the room input line is:

Line Voltage 400V 3-phase


Line Voltage tolerance ± 10 % ( absolute max. rating )
Line frequency 50 Hz – 60 Hz
Line frequency tolerance ±2%
Power source impedance @ 400V 0.20 Ω
Line input reactive power 120 kVA
Line input active power 100 KW
Stand-by power 300 VA
Peak power 2.000 VA

THE ROOM POWER DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT, DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING


PAGES, MUST BE USED BY THE INSTALLER AS GUIDE LINE FOR ANY SITE
SPECIFIC DESIGN.
The remote tilting table is also equipped with two emergency switches located on the
control desk and SFD keyboard. Such switches can be used to disable the room power
circuit or simply power off the table. The selection of the modality must be done by the
installer setting the position of the rotary switch SW18 mounted on the unit control board
as detailed in the following figure:

105 / 671
14 / 20
In particular the available settings are:

Position1 Emergency switches by pass.


In this modality, the serial of the system emergency switches contact is
forced Normally Closed.
Position 2 Emergency switches external mode
In this modality, the serial of the system emergency switches contacts is
available at CN106.1 and CN106.2 terminals.
This contact should be wired in serial with the room emergency circuit.
Position 3 Emergency switches internal mode
In this modality the system emergency switches, when activated, power off
only the table itself. In this case CN106.1 and CN106.2 terminals the can
not be wired in serial with the room emergency circuit.

In any dangerous situation, or in case a movement can not be stopped, the operator must
hit immediately one of these switches. The power circuit of the table is immediately
switched off, but all other units will continue to operate normally.

The emergency switch must be re-enabled only if the operator is absolutely sure that the
danger condition has been removed.
The emergency circuit of the room power distribution circuit must be connected to
terminals CN106.1 and CN106.2 of the system power cabinet as shown in the following
figure:

107 / 671
15 / 20
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
THE EMERGENCY CIRCUIT IS DESIGNED TO BE CONNECTED TO A 24V
ac/dc CIRCUIT WITH A MAXIMUM CURRENT FLOW OF 1A. THE
CONNECTION OF THE CN106.1 AND CN106.2 TERMINALS WITH AN
HIGHER VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT FLOW COULD PRODUCE SERIOUS
FAULT OF THE CONTROL CIRCUITS
THE INSTALLER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROPER OPERATION OF
THE EMERGENCY SWITCH.

109 / 671
16 / 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Committente/Impianto FOGLIO
Dis. N.

Denominazione Commessa. N. SEGUE


Via Negrelli, 55 LISSONE (MI) (ITALY)
Rev. N. Tel. (039) 24.315.1 Fax (039) 46.48.19

111 / 671
17 / 20

112 / 671
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9

Committente/Impianto FOGLIO
Dis. N.

Denominazione Commessa. N. SEGUE


Via Negrelli, 55 LISSONE (MI) (ITALY)
Rev. N. Tel. (039) 24.315.1 Fax (039) 46.48.19

113 / 671
18 / 20

114 / 671
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Committente/Impianto FO G LI O
Dis. N.

Denominazione Commessa. N. SEGUE


Via Negrelli, 55 LISSONE (MI) (ITALY)
Rev. N.
Tel. (039) 24.315.1 Fax (039) 46.48.19

115 / 671
19 / 20
5.8. INPUT LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION

In case the line voltage does not match the insulation transformer standard specification it
is necessary to install an external adaptation transformer or request that the unit be factory
configured ordering one of the following options:

220V ac INSULATION TRANSFORMER OPTION - ORDERING CODE: XSAA04

Line Voltage 220 / 240V 3-phase


Line Voltage tolerance ± 10 % (abs. max. rating )
Line frequency 50 Hz – 60 Hz
Line frequency tolerance ±2%
Stand-by power 1.000 VA
Peak power 4.000 VA

415V ac INSULATION TRANSFORMER OPTION - ORDERING CODE: XSAA05

Line Voltage 415 / 440V 3-phase


Line Voltage tolerance ± 10 % ( abs. max. rating )
Line frequency 50 Hz – 60 Hz
Line frequency tolerance ±2%
Stand-by power 1.000 VA
Peak power 4.000 VA

116 / 671
20 / 20

117 / 671
6. INSTALLATION
6.1. TILTING TABLE INSTALLATION

1. Open case n° 1 removing the cover and the side indicated as "side to open".
2. Remove all lateral covers of the case. Remove the bolts that fix the tilt assembly to
its wood frame.
3. Attach the items of the transportation kit p/n XSAB03 to the elevation guides of the
tilting base using the given M10 screws as shown in the following figure.

4.
Rai
se
the
bas
e
up
usin
g
the
whe
eled
jack
scre
ws
taki
ng
car
e to
kee
p it
relatively
level and slide it into the room to the installation point as shown in the following
figure.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER


THE TILT ASSEMBLY HAS OTLINE DIMENSIONS THAT REQUIRE DOORS
MINIMUM 80 cm WIDE IN ORDER TO ALLOW ITS TRANSPORTATION.
The transportation tools composing the XSAB03 are not shipped with each unit.
They must be purchased as separate item by the installer and re used for several
units.

118 / 671
1 / 32

119 / 671
5. Position the tilt assembly on the base plate (over or under floor) as detailed in
section 5 of the manual.
6. Verify for perfect level alignment with the floor using, if necessary, correction
spacers.
7. Lock the tilt assembly to the base plate using, if necessary, the additional spacer
and the fixation screws kit as shown in the following figure and detailed in section

120 / 671
2 / 32

121 / 671
8. Remove the transportation tools.

3 / 122
32 / 671
6.2. MOUNTING THE MAIN FRAME ASSEMBLY

1. Open case n° 2 removing the cover and the side indicated as "side to open".

2. Remove all packing materials, all singled packed parts fixed to the bottom side of
the case by means of tie rods, in order to freely access the main frame assembly.

3. Remove the tie rods that fix the main frame to the bottom side of the case.
Remove all lateral covers of the case.

4. Attach the transportation kit p/n XSAB03 to the main frame using the given M10
screws and the square nuts as shown in the following figure.

5. Raise the frame up using the wheeled jackscrews taking care to keep it relatively
level and slide it into the room.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER


THE TILT ASSEMBLY HAS OTLINE DIMENSIONS THAT REQUIRE DOORS
MINIMUM 65 cm WIDE IN ORDER TO ALLOW ITS TRANSPORTATION.
The transportation tools composing the XSAB03 are not shipped with each unit.
They must be purchased as separate item by the installer and re used for several
units.

6. Position the frame assembly in correspondence of the tilting base. Adjust the
height of the main frame in the way that the mounting flange of the main frame is
in correspondence with the rotation gear of the tilt tower as shown in the following
figure:

123 / 671
4 / 32

124 / 671
7. Connect the main frame with the tilt tower using the socket 1, locking washer 2
and M14x55 screws 3 as detailed in the previous figure. Tighten the screws in
cross sequence with a force not exceeding 10 Kgm. Remove the
transportation tools.

8. Route the Image system cables, the generator interface cable and the tube cables
set (H.V, rotor, DAP) to the entering point of the unit. Insert all accessories cables
inside the external plastic chain and divide them as shown in the following figure:

125 / 671
5 / 32

126 / 671
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER
In case the unit has been already configured in the factory all cables are already
routed inside the plastic chain and packed at the rear side of the tilt base. In such
case the installer must simply route the cables from the unit to the generator and
image processor cabinets.

9. Route the brushless driver cables through the hole created inside the rotation gear
and the main frame as shown in the following figure.

10. Route the brushless motors cables through the hole created inside the rotation
gear and the main frame as shown in the following figure.

127 / 671
6 / 32

128 / 671
11. Identify the SFD, the image system cables, the tabletop motor cables and
route them as detailed in the following figure:

12. Identify and the Tubestand and the X-ray tube driver assembly cables and
route them as detailed in the following figure:

129 / 671
7 / 32
131 / 671
8 / 32

132 / 671
6.3. MOUNTING THE TUBE ARM SUPPORT

1. Insert the tube arm 1 on the corresponding slot of the tube stand assembly 2,
being careful not to damage bearing 3 as shown in the following figure.

2. At the rear side, gently insert bearing 3. Fix the tube arm to the tube stand
assembly tightening the self locking nut 4 using the special tool Mecall p/n
ATTR049.

133 / 671
9 / 32
6.4. MOUNTING THE SPOT FILM DEVICE

1. Remove the tie rods that fix the SFD pallet to the bottom side of the case.

2. Remove the fixation screws mounted on the SFD supporting plate of the table.

3. Load the SFD assembly on a transpallet as shown in the attached figure and
position it on the front side of the table.

4. Lift the assembly up until the SFD fixation holes are aligned with the table
mounting plate as shown in the following figure:

5. Insert the eight M8 fixation screws 2 and tighten them with a force not exceeding
3,5 Kgm as shown in the following figure:

6. Insert the four M6 fixation screws 3 and tighten them with a force not exceeding 2
Kgm as shown in the following figure:

7. Mount the four fixation nuts 1 and tighten them slightly to prevent a damage of the
grains as shown in the following figure.

8. Drive the transpallet away form the unit and remove the SFD shipping frame 4
taking out screws 5 as shown in the following figure.

135 / 671
10 / 32

136 / 671
9. Remove the SFD back cover and route the SFD interconnection cables as shown
in the following figure.

10. Fix all cables connectors to the related mating plug on the SFD control board and
the ground cable to SFD central ground terminal as shown in the following figure.

11. Mount the end switches assemblies as shown in the following figure.

137 / 671
11 / 32
6.5. MOUNTING THE COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY

The compression cone assembly bar must be coupled with the SFD and the tube arm.

The operation is delicate and requires an assistant in addition to the installer.

1. At the SFD side, connect the the compression cone assembly bar 1 to the
attachment 7 by means of the four screws 6 as shown in the following figure.

2. Tighten them with a force not exceeding 2 Kgm.

3. At the tube arm assembly, remove cover 4 as shown in the following figure.

4. Mount the compression cone assembly bar 1 to the tube arm attachment by
means of the four screws 3. Tighten them with a force not exceeding 2 Kgm.
Re mount cover 4.

139 / 671
12 / 32

140 / 671
5. Remove the SFD bottom cover 9. Remove the transportation locks 8 as shown in
the following figure.

6. Route the compression cone assembly bar cables as indicated in the following
figure.

7. Connect plugs C702 and CN710 to the mating connectors as shown in the
following figure.

141 / 671
13 / 32
143 / 671
14 / 32

144 / 671
6.6. MOUNTING THE X-RAY TUBE

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER


The table has been designed in order to accept only the x-ray tube assemblies
listed in section 2.7. For each tube a specific attachment has been designed
and tested. It is installer responsibility to contact Mecall support in case the tube
assembly that is supposed to be installed on the unit is not present in the
compatibility list. Do not install non approved tube assembly if not authorized by
the Mecall support or several units.

1. The tube arm support is delivered with the X-ray tube adaptation block already
installed.

2. Remove the Tube fan assembly 4 fixed by means of screws 3.

3. Open the trunnion ring of the x-ray tube removing the screws 1 that connect the two
half-ring 2 and insert the X-ray tube.

4. Insert the x-ray tube into the trunnion ring and mount the two half rings 2.

5. Verify that the rotation of the x-ray tube inside the trunnion ring is regular and lock
screws 1.

6. Mount back the tube fan assembly 4.

145 / 671
15 / 32
147 / 671
16 / 32

148 / 671
6.7. MOUNTING THE COLLIMATOR

During the installation of the tube lower cover the installer must pay attention
that wings 19 of the tube support pass trough the slots of the cover and that
the cover itself is correctly fixed to its support and to the x-ray tube.

THE COLLIMATOR CONE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO PERFECTLY MATCH


THE X-RAY TUBES APPROVED FOR THE TABLE. THEREFORE NO
ADDITIONAL SPACERS MUST BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE TUBE
OUTPUT PORT AND THE MOUNTING CONE FOR ANY REASON.

1. Mount the tube lower cover that is fixed to the tube support by means of screws 11
and to the tube arm cover by means of screws 5.

2. Mount the collimator cone 15 to the tube output port using screws 14.

3. Unscrew the 4 socket head screws 13, which control the adapter seal tongues using
a 3-mm hexagon key 12.

4. Place the collimator on the cone and lock screws 13 in the way to fix the collimator
in a position mechanically centred with the cone.

5. Mount the tube rotation handle 18 taking care that cables 17 is routed through the
air slot of the tube lower cover. Using screws 16 connect the handle to the x-ray
tube support wings 19.

149 / 671
17 / 32
6. Remove the column top cover and route the collimator cable as shown in the
following figure. Connect plug CN601 at the collimator rear side and plug
CN510 on the tube stand control board.

151 / 671
18 / 32

152 / 671
7. If the unit is equipped with the optional Dose are meter system, the measuring
chamber must be mounted as indicated in the following figure. Also the
special interconnection cable must be routed as indicated in the same figure.

153 / 671
19 / 32

154 / 671
6.8. MOUNTING THE I. I./TV CAMERA ASSEMBLY

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER


The table has been designed to accept different models of Image Intensifiers. For
each of them has been a specific attachment kit has been designed.
The installer must makes sure that the required adaptation kit is available at the
installation side before starting the installation of the TV system.
THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER SUPPORTS ARE SPECIFIC FOR EACH IMAGE
INTENSIFIERS.DO NOT ADD OTHER COMPONENTS THAT INCREASE THE
MECHANICAL STRESS OF THE SUPPORT. CONTACT MECALL SUPPPORT IN
CASE OF NOT LISTED IMAGE INTENSIFIERS.
DO NOT STEP ON THE IMAGE SYSTEM

1. Mount the Image Intensifier adaptation support 1 to the Image intensifier itself. The
mounting procedure depends on the specific I.I. model and it is shown in the
following figure:

Kit p/n XSKA - Imager intensifier Thales model TH9428

155 / 671
20 / 32

156 / 671
Kit p/n XSKB - Imager intensifier Thales model TH9432 QX

Kit p/n XSKC - Imager intensifier Thales models TH9447 QX & TH9436 QX

2. Tilt the unit to the +90° position in order to have an easy access to the SFD
bottom side.
3. Remove the six fixation nuts from the Image Intensifier support.

157 / 671
21 / 32
4. Insert the number of spacers specified in the previous drawings and necessary to
align the Image Intensifier center with the SFD center.

5. Fix the I. I. assembly to the SFD support using the six nut M5 and tighten them with
a force not exceeding 1,5 Kgm as shown in the following figure.

6. Route the Image system cables as shown in the following figure.

7. Mount the SFD lower cover and the main frame lateral covers as shown in
the following figures.

159 / 671
22 / 32

160 / 671
8.Check that the minimum elevation end switches cams are set in the way that at the
minimum elevation position the Image system does not collide with the
floor as detailed in the following figures.

161 / 671
23 / 32
9. The installer must choose the correct position using as reference the following table
that describes the supported Image systems length

I.I. SUPPORTED MINIMUM TABLETOP TO END SWITCHES


SIZE IMAGE SYSTEM FLOOR DISTANCE POSITION

9" TH9428 - CD100 600 mm Position #1 - 600 mm


9" TH9428 - CD1000 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - EDS CD 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - HIRIS-A PLUS 664 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - HIRIS-T PLUS 669 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
12" TH9432 - CD100 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
12" TH9432 - CD1000 796 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - EDS CD 796 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - HIRIS-A PLUS 773 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - HIRIS-T PLUS 779 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
14" TH9435 - HIRIS-A PLUS 808 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
16" TH9447 - EDS CD 843 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
16" TH9447 - HIRIS-A PLUS 843 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
16" TH9447 - HIRIS-T PLUS 851 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
PIXIUM 5100 500 mm Position #0 - 500 mm
DETECTOR

10. Once moved the cams to the correct position, the installer must inform the table
CPU setting the selection bit switch as detailed in the following figure and carry out
the calibration procedure described in sections 8

163 / 671
24 / 32
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER:
The collision software has been designed in the way that the minimum distance
between the bottom side of the image system and the floor is equal or greater than 50
mm as shown in the following figure:

In case the image system installed on the unit is not present in the
supported image systems list, the installer is responsible to set the
elevation end switches in the way to grant the 50 mm minimum distance.

164 / 671
25 / 32

165 / 671
6.9. MOUNTING THE TABLETOP

1. Insert the square nuts 3 in the main beam slots. Mount the tabletop right support 1
using the ten M6 fixations screws 2; insert support 4 in the internal side of the main
beam and fix it using the three M10 screws 5 and the nut 6 as shown in the
following figure. Align the external edge of the support with the edge of the main
beam and tighten all screws.

2. Mount the tabletop assembly to the supporting arms 1 using the four M8 screws 2
as shown in the following figure. Do not tighten the fixation screws 2.

166 / 671
26 / 32

167 / 671
3. Slide the linear bearing 1 along the tabletop rails 2 and fix them to the SFD support
3 by means of screws 4 as shown in the following figure.
Align the tabletop and tighten the screws with a force not exceeding 1,5 Kgm. At
the tabletop supporting arm side tighten screw 2 as shown in the figure of step 2.

4. Connect the linear actuator plugs to the mating connectors as shown in the following
figure

168 / 671
27 / 32
5. Connect the linear actuator 9 to the tabletop attachment bracket 6 using Seeger
7 and to the support using seeger 8. Connect the attachment bracket 6 to the
tabletop using screws 5 as shown in the following figure.
Mount cover 4.

170 / 671
28 / 32

171 / 671
6.10. CONTROL DESK INSTALLATION

1. Position the control desk in the control room.

2. Route the console cable, the I/O safety cable, the ground cable and the power
supply/emergency cable up to the control desk.

3. At the control desk side, connect:

The Console cable to plug CN1005;


The I/O safety cable to plug CN1004;
The power supply/emergency cable to plug CN1022;
The ground cable to the console ground terminal

As shown in the following figure.

4. At the control desk connect the fluoro foot switch cable to plug CN1001.

5. At the unit main control board side, connect:

The Console cable to plug CN128


The I/O safety cable to plug CN129

29 / 32172 / 671
5. At the Table cabinet side connect the console ground cable to the ground
terminals block and the power supply/emergency cable to plug CN105 as
described in the following figures:

173 / 671
30 / 32
GROUND TERMINAL

174 / 671
6.11. MOUNTING THE COVERS

Mount all unit covers as described in the following figures.

175 / 671
31 / 32
177 / 671
32 / 32

178 / 671
7. INTERFACE CIRCUIT
7.1. INTRODUCTION

This section of the manual describes the HW interconnections and the security lines
among the different components of the remote tilting system.
It must be underlined that the interface circuit described in this section represents only the
physical interconnections between the single system components and the entire interfacing
possibility.

The system interface circuit has been designed in order to insulate all input signal by
means of photo-coupler factory configured to accept 24V dc-input signals.
The diode of the input photo coupler can be supplied using the on board 24V DC or an
external one by means of proper jumpers settings.

All outputs have open collector configuration; as common return the External I/O Interface
board GND must be used. The maximum current sink for each single output is 30 mA -
40V.

WARNING:
BEFORE TO CHANGING THE INTERNAL INTERFACE CIRCUIT THE
INSTALLER MUST MAKE BE SURE THAT THE 24V DC JUMPERS HAVE
BEEN PROPERLY SET TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUITS AMONG THE
DIFFERENT ACCESSORIES POWER SUPPLIES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INTERFACE ANY EXTERNAL ACCESSORY IF
SECTION 2.7 OF THE PRESENT MANUAL HAS NOT BEEN CAREFULLY
READ.

179 / 671
1 / 50
7.2. INTERFACE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

All interface signals are available at DB connectors CN170, CN164 and CN169 located on
the main control board and they are divided in the following groups:

TECHNIQUE SELECTION INPUTS

By means of these input signals it is possible to select the operative mode; usually this
input are driven by the x-ray generator in the way that the selection of a particular working
station at the generator console automatically force a specific mode of the table. In
particular:

Technique # 1 - CN170.16 - CN164.16 - CN169.21


In this modality, the control circuits enables the automatic Spot Film Device or the
Image Intensifier as sole image receptor with he following consequences:

The exposure sequence is interlocked by the SFD status.


The exposure release is synchronized with the position of the oscillating grid.
In case the unit is interfaced with a supported digital image processor, the continuous or
pulsed fluoro exposure is controlled by the image processor in order to use its LIH and
noise suppression features.
The collimator enters in auto mode.
Tomography exposures are allowed.

Technique # 2 - CN170.35 - CN164.35 - CN169.19


In this modality, the unit control circuits enables the Image Intensifier as sole image
receptor with he following consequences:

The radiographic exposure is released under the control of the Image processor once the
cassette reaches the parking position.
The continuous or pulsed fluoro exposure is released under the control of the Image
processor.
The collimator enters in auto mode.
Tomography exposures are allowed. Because the Image Intensifier input plane is lower
than the cassette plane the Unit control, circuit automatically corrects the tomo layer
setting.
The oscillation of the grid can be disabled if necessary ti improve the image quality.

Technique # 3 - CN170.17 - CN164.17 - CN169.20


In this modality, the Unit control circuits disables both the SFD and the Image Intensifier
and the table operates a simple x-ray tube support with the following consequences:
The continuous or pulsed fluoro exposure is disabled.
The radiographic exposure is not interlock by the unit and its is switched under the direct
control of the X-ray generator.
The automatic SFD is disabled with the exception of the front keyboard that remains
active.
The tomography mode is disabled.
The collimator automatically enters in full manual mode.

181 / 671
2 / 50

182 / 671
Technique # 4 - CN170.18 - CN164.18 - CN169.18

In this modality the remote tilting table behaves as described for Technique # 3.

Technique # 5 - CN170.23 - CN164.23 - CN169.17

In this modality the system remote tilting table behaves as described for Technique # 3.

c
STEP •
TECH #3
Free TECH 4 PREPARATION
Free Free TECH #1
TECH #4 GEN READY - TECH #3 EXPOSURE
TECH #2 Free TECH #2 GENREADY-
FLUORO KV AUTO TECH #1 FL UO RO
• Free Free XRAY ON -
Free GND INT ESI SELECT
GEN READY - TOMO SELECT
Free
Free •
GND INT I.I. ZOOM 1
Free I.I. ZOOM N Free +24V GEN
Free
I.I. ZOOM COM1 • I.I. ZOOM 2
FLUORO KV MAN Free
TECH #5 ESI SELECT AUX COLLIM
TOMO CODE D0 V-REV NO1 XRAY ON - Free
CENTERED I.I.
TOMO CODE D1 H-REV NO1 FLUORO Free
I.I. ZOOM3 NO1 EXPOSURE ZOOM 3 BEAM
SUBDIV SEL TV REV COM1 PREPARATION Free
I.I. ZOOM2 NO1 GRAFIA (2nd STEP) TVREVCOM2 FILTER #1 BEAM
STEP PREPARATION Free
I.I. ZOOM1 NO1 I.I. ZOOM1 NO2 I.I. H-REVNO2 FILTER #2 Free
+24V GEN FLUORO Free
GRAFIA(2nd STEP) ZOOM2 NO2 I.I. kV •
Free AUX V-REVNO2 Free
EXPOSURE ZOOM3 NO2 kV -
Free • 2 Free I.I.ZOOMCOM2 SUBDIVISION
4V INT Free H R E V NO 2
Free XRAY ON - Free
GND INT. TECH #5 V R E V NO 2
Free ESI SELECT TOMOSELECT Free
GND INT. TOMO CODE D1
Free TECH #5
Free TOMO CODE D0 FLUOROkVAUTO Free
TECH #1 Free TECH #4
Free Free Free
TECH #3 TOMO SELECT Free TECH #2
ec

CN170 CN164 CN169

GENERATOR INTERFACE SIGNALS

By means of these signals is possible to synchronize the generator exposure with the
system status. In particular:

Preparation - CN170.10 - CN164.10 - CN169.2

When active transfer the preparation command to the X-ray generator.

Grafia (2nd step) - CN170.28 - CN164.28

When active transfer the "second step" command to the CASTOR X-ray generator. Only
after that this signal is received the generator enables the Ready output at the end of the
preparation sequence. This signal is not required for other generators.

Exposure - CN170.29 - CN164.29 - CN169.3

When active transfer the exposure release command to the X-ray generator.

Fluoro - CN170.11 - CN164.11 - CN169.4

When active requests the start of continuous (or pulsed) exposure to the X-ray generator.

Gen. Ready - - CN170.37 - CN164.36 - CN169.22

When active indicates that the generator has correctly ended the preparation sequence
and it is ready to expose. This signal can be an active low input referred to the unit gnd or

183 / 671
3 / 50

184 / 671
referred to the generator 24Vdc. In this case it is necessary to connect the generator
24Vdc power supply to CN170.36 - CN169.24 and chose the correct setting of jumper
SW9.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
In case the table is interface with an X-RAY generator in which the Ge.
Ready (bucky start) signal is a 110/220V ac output, the installer must use
only the input terminals of connector CN173.

XRay - On - CN170.30 - CN164.30 - CN169.23


When active indicates that the generator is releasing the exposure.
The transition low / high transition of this input indicates the end of the exposure and
cause the cassette tray to move one step ahead.
This signal can be an active low input referred to the unit gnd or referred to the generator
24Vdc. In this case it is necessary to connect the generator 24Vdc power supply to
CN170.36 - CN169.24 and chose the correct setting of jumper SW10.

The timing diagram that must be respected in order to correctly synchronize the generator
with the table can be summarized as follows:

Free STEP
TECH #3 4V INT
PREPARATION
Free GEN READY - TECH 4 TECH #1
Free T ECH #4
TECH #3 EXPOSURE
Free TECH #2 GEN READY -
TECH #2 FLUORO KV AUTO
TECH #1 FLUORO
+24V GEN Free Free XRAY ON -
Free GND INT ESI SELECT
GEN READY - TOMO SELECT Free +24V GEN
Free GND INT I.I. ZOOM 1
Free I.I. ZOOM N Free •
Free •
I.I. ZOOM COM1 ESI SELECT Free I.I. ZOOM 2
FLUORO KV MAN TECH #5 AUX COLLIM
TOMO CODE D0 V-REV NO1 XRAY ON -
FLUORO Free
TOMO CODE D1 H-REV NO1 CENTERED I.I.
EXPOSURE Free
I.I. ZOOM3 NO1 PREPARATION ZOOM 3 BEAM
TV REV COM1 GRAFIA (2nd STEP) Free
SUBDIV SEL I.I. ZOOM2 NO1 TV REV COM2 FILTER #1 BEAM
STEP PREPARATION I.I. ZOOM1 NO2 Free
I.I. ZOOM1 NO1 H-REV NO2 FILTER #2 Free
• 24V GEN FLUORO I.I. ZOOM2 NO2 Free
GRAFIA (2nd STEP) V-REV NO2 kV •
Free AUX I.I. ZOOM3 NO2 Free
EXPOSURE kV -
Free • 24V I.I. ZOOM COM2
Free SUBDIVISION
INT Free
Free XRAY ON - H REV NO2
TECH #5 Free
GND INT. TOMO SELECT V REV NO2
Free ESI SELECT TOMO CODE D1 Free
GND INT. FLUORO kV AUTO
Free Free TOMO CODE D0 Free TECH #5
TECH #1 Free TECH #4
Free Free TOMO SELECT Free
TECH #3 Free TECH #2

CN170 CN164 CN169

185 / 671
4 / 50

186 / 671
FLUOROSCOPY RELEASE TIMING DIAGRAM
fluoro footpedal
(operator presses foorpedal)

FLUORO
(clisis table starts fluoroscopy)
output status depends on operator

input status depends on operator


(not necessary for correct fluroscopy release)
xray on
(generator expose time)

SINGLE EXPOSURE TIMING DIAGRAM


preparation
(operator presses prep. button)
output status depends on operator

grafia (2nd step)


(operator presses exp button)
(required by castor generators only) output status depends on operator

input status depends on prep & grafia status


gen ready
(generator is ready to expose)

exposure
(clisis table starts the exposure)

xray on
(generator expose time)

SERIAL EXPOSURE TIMING DIAGRAM


preparation
(operator presses prep. button)

grafia (2nd step)

gen ready
(generator is ready to expose)

exposure
(clisis table starts the exposure)

xray on
(generator expose time)

TOMOGRAPHY EXPOSURE TIMING DIAGRAM


preparation
(operator presses prep. button) (column
moves to the starting position) output status depends on operator

grafia (2nd step)


(operator presses exp button)
(required by castor generators only) output status depends on operator

input status depends on prep & grafia status


gen ready
(generator is ready to expose)
(tomography movement starts)

exposure
(clisis drive the exposure during selected angle)

xray on
(generator expose time 2,5 s)

187 / 671
5 / 50

188 / 671
IMAGE SYSTEM SIGNALS

These signals are used in order to remote some I.I. system controls on the Unit
console. In particular:

I.I. Zoom common - CN170.6 - CN164.6

This is the common power supply that must be returned to the Image system to enable the
Image Intensifier zooms

I.I. Zoom1 - CN170.27 - CN164.27 - CN169.6

This is a normally open contact that, when active, can be used to supply Zoom1 of Image
intensifier.

I.I. Zoom2 - CN170.26 - CN164.26 - CN169.7

This is a normally open contact that, when active, can be used to supply Zoom2 of Image
intensifier.

I.I. Zoom3 - CN170.25 - CN164.25 - CN169.9

This is a normally open contact that, when active, can be used to supply Zoom3 of Image
intensifier.

TV rev com - CN170.9 - CN164.9

This is the common power supply that must be returned to the Image system to enable the
H and V reverse.

H-rev - CN170.8 - CN164.8 - CN169.15

This is a normally open contact that, when active, can be used to enable the Horizontal
reverse of the CCD camera.

V-rev - CN170.7 - CN164.7 - CN169.16

This is a normally open contact that, when active, can be used to enable the Horizontal
reverse of the CCD camera.

Fluoro kV auto - CN170.19 - CN164.3

When active transfer to the X-ray generator the request to enable the automatic fluoro Kv
regulation.

Fluoro kV manual - CN170.39

When active transfer to the X-ray generator the request to disable the automatic fluoro Kv
regulation.

189 / 671
6 / 50

190 / 671
STEP • 24V INT
Free TECH #3
TECH 4 PREPARATION
F ree Free GEN READY - TECH #1
TECH #4 T ECH #3 EXPOSURE
T ECH #2 Free T ECH #2 GEN READY -
FLUORO KV AUTO TECH #1 FLUORO
• 24V Free Free XRAY ON -
Free G ND INT ESI SELECT
GENGEN TOMO SELECT Free •
Free G ND INT I.I. ZOOM 1
READY-Free I.I. ZOOM N Free •
Free •
FLUOROKV I.I. ZOOM COM1 ESI SELECT Free I.I. ZOOM 2
TECH #5 4V INT
AUX COLLIM
MANTOMO V-REV NO1 XRAY ON - Free
FLUORO CENTERED I.I.
CODED0 H-REV NO1 EXPOSURE Free
I.I. ZOOM3 NO1 PREPARATION ZOOM 3 BEAM
TOMOCODE TV REV COM1 I.I. GRAFIA (2nd STEP) Free
ZOOM2 NO1 TV REV COM2 FILTER #1 BEAM
D1SUBDIVSEL PREPARATION I.I. I.I. ZOOM1 NO2 Free
ZOOM1 NO1 H-REV NO 2 FILTER #2 Free
STEP FLUORO I.I. ZOOM2 NO2 Free
GRAFIA (2nd STEP) V-REV NO2 kV •
• 24V AUX I.I. ZOOM3 NO2 Free
EXPOSURE I.I. ZOOM COM2 kV -
GEN • 24V Free SUBDIVISION
INT Free
Free XRAY ON - H REV NO 2
T ECH #5 Free
GND INT. TOMO SELECT V REV NO 2
Free ESI SELECT TOMO CODE D1 Free
GND INT. FLUORO kV AUTO TECH #5
Free Free TOMO CODE D0 Free
TECH #1 Free TECH #4
Free Free TOMO SELECT Free
TECH #3 Free TECH #2

CN170 CN164 CN169

TOMOGRAPHY INTERFACE SIGNALS

Tomo - CN170.4 - CN164.4 -20

When active indicates that the unit is working in tomography mode.

Tomo code D0 - CN170.40 - CN164.21

Tomo code D1 - CN170.41 - CN164.22

The configuration of these two outputs indicates the tomography angle selected by the
operator. In particular:

Output name Tomo angle Tomo angle Tomo angle Tomo angle
= 8° = 20° = 30° = 40°

TOMO CODE ON OFF ON OFF


D0
TOMO CODE ON ON OFF OFF
D1

Where: ON = output low


OFF = output O.C.
The interface circuits also includes specific output that indicates the selection of each
tomography angle. In particular:
Time D0 - CN170.38 - Active low when tomo 8° selected;
Time D1 - CN170.22 - Active low when tomo 20° selected;
Time D2 - CN170.21 - Active low when tomo 30° selected;
Time D3 - CN170.20 - Active low when tomo 40° selected;

191 / 671
7 / 50

192 / 671
STEP •
Free TECH #3
T ECH 4 PREPARATION
Free Free GEN READY - TECH #1
T ECH #4 T ECH #3 EXPOSURE
TECH #2 Free TECH #2 GEN READY -
FLUORO IOV AUTO TECH #1 FLUORO
• 24V GEN Free Free XRAY ON -
Free GND INT ESI SELECT
GEN TOMO SELECT Free •
Free GND INT I.I. ZOOM 1
I.I. ZOOM N 4V GEN
READ Free •
Free • I.I. ZOOM 2
Y- I.I. ZOOM COM1 4V GEN
ESI SELECT 4V INT Free
TECH #5 AUX COLLIM
Free V-REV NO1 XRAY ON -
FLUORO Free CENTERED I.I.
FLUO H-REV NO1 EXPOSURE
I.I. ZOOM3 NO1 Free ZOOM 3 BEAM
PREPARATION
RO TV REV COM1 GRAFIA (2nd STEP)
I.I. ZOOM2 NO1 Free
TV REV COM2 FILTER #1 BEAM
IOV PREPARATION I.I. ZOOM1 NO2 Free
I.I. ZOOM1 NO1 H-REV NO2 FILTER #2 Free
MAN FLUORO I.I. ZOOM2 NO2 Free
GRAFIA (2nd STEP) V-REV NO2 kV •
TOM AUX I.I. ZOOM3 NO2 Free
EXPOSURE I.I. ZOOM COM2 kV -
O • 24V Free SUBDIVISION
INT Free H R E V NO 2
COD XRAY ON - TECH #5 Free
GND INT. TOMO SELECT V R E V NO 2
E D0 ESI SELECT TOMO CODE D1 Free
GND INT. FLUORO kV AUTO TECH #5
TOM Free TOMO CODE D0 Free
TECH #1 Free TECH #4
O Free TOMO SELECT Free
TECH #3 Free TECH #2

CN170 CN164 CN169

SPECIAL INTERFACE SIGNALS

Subdiv sel - CN170.42 - CN169.33

When active indicates that the SFD near film shutters cover the central field of the AEC
detector. This signal can be used to switch of the AEC system.

Collim centered - CN169.8

When active indicates that the collimator is not aligned with the SFD center.

Beam Filter #1 - CN169.10

When active indicates that the 0,1 mm Cu filter is inserted. This output is active only
if the collimator is equipped with the motorized beam hardening filters.

Beam Filter #2 - CN169.11

When active indicates that the 0,2 mm Cu filter is inserted. This output is active only
if the collimator is equipped with the motorized beam hardening filters.

Esi sel - CN170.31 - CN164.31 - CN169.5

This output is set low by the Unit control electronic when the digital mode has been
enabled. This signal can be used to enable/disable the spot acquisition mode of the Digital
image processor.

Step - CN170.43 - CN164.19

When active force the Unit table to move the SFD/TUBE assembly one step ahead if the
digital stepping module is enabled.

193 / 671
8 / 50

194 / 671
STEP *24V INT
Free
TECH 4 TECH #3 PREPARATION
Free GEN READY - TECH #1
Free TECH TECH #4 T ECH #3 EXPOSURE
Free T ECH #2
#2 *24V FLUORO KV AUTO GEN READY -
TECH #1 FLUORO
Free Free XRAY ON -
GEN GEN Free G ND INT ESI SELECT
TOMO SELECT Free *24V GEN
READY - Free G ND INT I.I. ZOOM 1
I.I. ZOOM N Free *24V GEN
Free Free * 24V I NT I.I. ZOOM 2
FLUORO I.I. ZOOM COM1 E SI S EL E CT Free
TECH #5 AUX COLLIM CENTERED
KV MAN V-REV NO1 XRAY ON - Free
F LUO RO I.I. ZOOM 3
TOMO H-REV NO1 EXPOSURE Free
I.I. ZOOM3 NO1 PREPARATION BEAM FILTER #1
CODE D0 TV REV COM1 GRAFIA (2nd STEP) Free
I.I. ZOOM2 NO1 TV REV COM2 BEAM FILTER #2
TOMO PREPARATION I.I. ZOOM1 NO2 Free
I.I. ZOOM1 NO1 H-REV NO2 Free
CODE D1 FLUORO I.I. ZOOM2 NO2 Free
GRAFIA (2nd STEP) V-REV NO2 kV *
SUBDIV AUX I.I. ZOOM3 NO2 Free
EXPOSURE I.I. ZOOM COM2 kV -
SEL STEP *24V INT Free
XRAY ON - Free SUBDIV SEL
*24V GEN GND INT. Free H REV NO 2
T ECH #5
ESI SELECT TOMO SELECT V REV NO2
Free Free GND INT. TOMO CODE D1 Free
Free FLUORO kV AUTO
Free Free TECH #1 TOMO CODE D0 Free TECH #5
Free
Free Free TECH #3 Free Free TECH #4
TOMO SELECT
Free TECH #2

CN170 CN164 CN169

SAFETY INTERFACE SIGNALS

This set of inputs must be used to limit the movements in case the unit is installed in a
room with other accessories that could create collision situation with the table or in case
there are architectural limits that can not be considered by the anti collision software.
The external safety detectors must be wired as clean NC contacts at terminal block
CN172

Film Changer - CN172.8 - CN172.7

When active disables the tilt movement once the table has reached the horizontal
position.
Usually this input is used when special accessories are placed under the tabletop.

CTM Park - CN172.10 - CN172.9

When active disables all unit movements.


Usually this input is activated when a ceiling suspension installed on the room is moved
out of its parking position.

Right Limit - CN172.4 - CN172.3

When active stops all unit movements in the right direction.


Usually this input is activated when, during the movement, one component of the unit
comes close to a collision point with an architectural limit of the room.

Left Limit - CN172.6 - CN172.5

When active stops all unit movements in the left direction.


Usually this input is activated when, during the movement, one component of the unit
comes close to a collision point with an architectural limit of the room.

Ceiling Limit - CN172.2 - CN172.1

195 / 671
When active stops all unit movements in the ceiling direction.
9 / 50

196 / 671
Usually this input is activated when, during the movement, one component of the unit
comes close to a collision point with an architectural limit of the room.

EXTERNAL EXPOSURE CONTROLS

This set of inputs must be used to connect an external fluoro/exposure foot pedal when
the operator needs to control the exposure release when working at the table side (i.e
during interventional procedures). The external foot pedal must be wired as clean NC
contacts at terminal block CN174.

Ext - Fluoro - CN174.8 - CN174.7

When active starts the fluoroscopy exposure release as previously described.

Ext - Prep - CN174.4 - CN174.3

When active starts the exposure preparation as previously described.

Ext - Exp - CN174.6 - CN174.5

When active starts the exposure release as previously described.

197 / 671
10 / 50

198 / 671
7.3. GENERATOR INTERFACE

IMPORTANT NOTICE
The interface circuit described in this paragraph requires that all generator inputs
are optpo coupled - 24V dc and all generator output are Open collector - 24V dc
capable to sink at least 30 mA. In the negative it is installer responsibility to
provide the necessary lines adapters.

The minimum interface circuit between the table and a generic X-ray generator can
be summarized as follows:

199 / 671
CN16 4.14-15 11 / 50
CN170.14 -15
GENERATOR GND CLISIS GND

CLIS IS 24V
2K4
CN169.21
C N1 6 4 . 16
C N1 7 0 . 16
TECH #1 SELECT ION

2K4
C N1 69.19
C N1 64.35
C N1 70.35
TECH #2 SELECTION

2K4
C N1 69.20
C N1 64.17
C N1 70.17
TECH #3 SELECTION

C N1 6 9 . 2
C N1 64.10
C N1 70.10
PREPARATION TO GENERATOR

UN L2003
MAX 30 mA
C N1 64.28
C N1 70.28
GRAFIA (2nd STEP) TO GENERATOR

UN L2003
CN169.3 MAX 30 mA
C N1 64.29
C N1 70.29
EXPOSURE TO GENERATOR

UN L2003
C N1 6 9 . 4 MAX 30 mA
CN164.11
CN170.11
FLUORO TO GENERATOR

UN L2003
MAX 30 mA
CN164.4 - 20
C N1 7 0 . 4
TOMOGRAPHY SELECTION TO GENERATOR

UN L2003
MAX 30 mA
CLIS IS 24V
2K4
C N1 69.22
C N1 6 4 . 36
C N1 70.37
GENERATOR READY (OV)

2K4
C N1 6 9 . 26
C N1 64.30
C N1 70.30
XRAY ON (OV)

SWITCH SW3 MUST BE SET IN POSITION 1-2

SWITCH SW2 MUST BE SET IN POSITION 1-2

SWITCH SW6 MUST BE SET IN POSITION 1-2

CLISIS MAIN BOARD

200 / 671
In case the table is combined with a CASTOR HF generator, the suggested connection is:

GTB 429 FLUORO CN170-36

GTB 422 PREPARATION CN170-10

GTB 425 II STEP (GRAFIA) CN170-28

GTB 432 EXPOSURE CN170-29

GTB 319 RX-ON CN170-30

GTB 454 FLUORO AUTO/MANU AL CN170-19

GTB 112 GEN READY (BUCKY START) CN170-37

GTB 120 TECH. #1 (SUPERIX) CN170-16

GTB 122 TECH #2 (DIGITAL) CN170-35

GTB 124 TECH #3 (DIRECT) CN170-17

GTB 444 TOMO ON CN170-4

GTB 113 GN D CN170-14


GTB 119
CN170-15
GTB 449
GTB 318
CLISIS TABLE
CASTOR HF GENERATOR

In case the table is combined with a CASTOR R generator, the suggested connection is:

CASTOR R GENERATOR CN170-10


GTB 114 PREPARATI ON ( IPR-C)

GTB 127 II STEP (ISR-C) CN170-28

GTB 125 EXPOSURE (IRP) CN170-29

GTB 222 RX-ON (ORT) CN170-30

GTB 1 18 FLUORO (IFS) CN170-11

GTB 2 07 GEN READY -BU CKY START (OBS-1) CN170-37

GTB 135 TECH. #1 - SFD MODE (WS-1) CN170-16

GTB 138 TECH #3 - DIRECT (WS-3) CN170-17

GTB 113 T O MO A CN170-4

GTB 104 0 Vdc CN170-14

GTB 139
GTB 2 21 CLISIS TABLE
GTB 2 06
GTB 121
GTB 1 16

201 / 671
12 / 50

202 / 671
7.4. CASTOR GENERATORS & CD100 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE

The CD100 Image system does not require any particular interface circuit, because all
control signals are available at the interface connectors CN170 and CN164.

It is anyhow possible to order specific CD100 interface kit for Castor generators composed
by a set of factory cables as detailed in the interface drawings SXX00S1901 and
SXX00S2001 using the following ordering codes:

RTA62 - CLISIS - CD100 interface kit for CASTOR HF generator

RTA63 - CLISIS - CD100 interface kit for CASTOR R generator

It is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3
and detailed in the following figure:

203 / 671
13 / 50
CN1 6 4 - 6
CN1 6 4 - 9
CM 1- 10 +24V dc CN1 64 -1 3

CM 1-11 FLUORO ( - ) CN164-1 1

CM 1-1 ZOOM 1 CN1 64 -2 7

CM 1 - 2 ZOOM 2 CN1 64 -2 6

CM 1 - 3 ZOOM 3 CN1 64 -2 5

CM 1 - 4 H - REV CN1 6 4 - 8

CM 1 - 5 V - REV CN1 6 4 - 7

CM 1 - 9 GND CN1 64 -1 5

CM 2 - 3 FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( + ) PREPARATION CN1 70 -1 0

II STEP (GRAFIA) CN1 70 -2 8


CM 2 - 4 FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( - )
EXPOSURE CN1 70 -2 9

R X- O N CN1 70 -3 0
CM 2 - 3 FLUORO ERROR ( + )
FLUORO AUTO/MANUAL CN1 70 -1 9
CM 2 - 3 FLUORO ERROR ( - )
GENERATOR READY ( BUCKY START) CN1 70 -3 7

TECH. #1 (SFD MODE) CN1 70 -1 6

IS CD 100 IMAGE SYSTEM TECH #3 (DIRECT) CN1 70 -1 7

TOM O O N CN1 7 0 - 4

TOMO TIME D0 CN1 70 -3 8

TOMO TIME D1 CN1 70 -2 2

TOMO TIME D2 CN170-2 1

TOMO TIME D3 CN1 70 -2 0

GND CN1 70 -1 4

CN1 70 -1 5

CLISIS TABLE
GTB 319
GTB 454
GTB422

GTB432
GTB429

GTB425

GTB444

GTB445

GTB113
GTB406

GTB428

GTB120

GTB447

GTB449
GTB112

GTB124

GTB448

GTB446

GTB119

GTB318
GTB401
GTB402

GTB405

CASTOR HF GENERATOR
NOTE OLD DRAWING NUMBER DATE VISA

REV.

DATE JU LY 2005 CABLES TOLLERANCES FROM S/N T O S/ N

SIGN. DIMENSIONS < 0.5 mt. 0.5 - 2.0 mt. > 2.0 mt. 001 / 100

VISA TOLLERANCE -0/+0.5 cm / mt -0/+1 cm / mt -0/+4 cm / mt PAGE 1 OF 1

DESCRIPTION CODE REVISION


MECALL srl CLISIS - CASTOR HF & CD100 INTERFACE
(KIT p/n RTA62) SXX00S1901
Via Negrelli, 55 - Lis sone - Italy

This drawing is a property of MECALL srl and can not be reproduced or transferred to third parties

204 / 671
14 / 50
CN164-6
CN164-9
CM 1-10 +2 4 V dc CN164-13

CM 1-11 FLUORO ( - ) CN164-11

CM 1-1 ZOOM 1 CN164-27

CM 1-2 ZO OM 2 CN164-26

CM 1-3 ZO OM 3 CN164-25

CM 1-4 H - REV CN164-8

CM 1-5 V - REV CN164-7

CM 1-9 G ND CN164-15

CM 2-3 FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( + ) PREPARATION CN170-10

II STEP (GRAFIA) CN170-28


CM 2-4 FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( - )
EXPOSURE CN170-29

RX-O N CN170-30
CM 2-3 FLUORO ERROR( +)

CM 2-3 FLUORO ERROR( - )


GENERATOR READY ( BUCKY START) CN170-37

TECH. #1 (SFD MODE) CN170-16

IS CD 100 IMAGE SYSTEM TECH #3 (DIRECT) CN170-17

TOMO ON CN170-4

TOMO CODE D0 CN170-38

TOMO CODE D1 CN170-22

TOMO CODE D2 CN170-21

TOMO CODE D3 CN170-20

GND CN170-14

CN170-15

CLISIS TABLE
GTB114

GTB125
GTB118

GTB127

GTB222

GTB121
GTB119

GTB135

GTB104
GTB104

GTB108

GTB207

GTB138

GTB206
GTB221

GTB116
GTB139
GTB107

GTB105

CASTOR R GENERATOR
NOTE OL D DRAWING NUMBER DATE VISA

REV.

DATE JULY 2005 CABLES TOLLERANCES FROM S/N TO S/N

S I G N. DIMENSIONS < 0.5 mt. 0.5 - 2.0 mt. > 2.0 mt. 001 / 100

VISA TOLLERA NCE -0/+0.5 cm / mt -0/+1 cm / mt -0/+4 cm / mt P AG E 1 OF 1

MECALL srl DESCRIPTION CODE REVISION


CLISIS - CASTOR R & CD100 INTERFACE
(KIT p/n RTA62) SXX00S2001
Via Negrelli, 55 - Lissone - Italy

This drawing is a property of MECALL srl and can not be reproduced or transfer red to third parti es

205 / 671
15 / 50
7.5. DEIMOS GENERATOR & CD100 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE

The CD100 Image system does not require any particular interface circuit, because all
control signals are available at the interface connectors CN170 and CN164.
It is anyhow possible to order the specific RTA64 CD100 interface kit for INDICO100
generator. The kit is composed of a set of interface cables and the interconnection circuit is
indicated in the interface drawing ref. RTA64.
It is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3
and detailed in the following figure:

In addition, the generator active receptors must be configured as follows:


Working station 1 (technique selection 1): Fluoro and SFD mode;

206 / 671
16 / 50

207 / 671
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER:
For a proper operation of the CD100 image system, the Indico 100 ABS circuit
must be configured as follows:

208 / 671
17 / 50
ri Gonfi.), General« 01111..... 7.0.4
›et,

Tube I
T
NU: 0%
I iaoro Setup
50 Oeueralteuere euwe luce
/88.1:loseUn%o Man. Neo Urina
Neg
100
loop Oen 511

MerneeteCu.. 17 '4-
10 0e101.3100». W
M. 0004 0 rESE-
00401 2W
0 v Ce. I
7 0 84 0 0 0 0 1 1 [
3P 48e8910010.e10

i 0013
E 1V9f.
lecbolque
. 1 r 1 15 3 r B E O

Neeepaa

rr

111W____nr~
r

Working station 3 (technique selection 3): Direct exposures. Fluoro and SFD are not
enabled
IrGenWare37 Gemuto, Within &tisk. 7.0.4
0
q-TiPMW ERI-T971.7fIT:9Pril.71

NU: 0%
e ma«. j n. Recedimi RlaeOba ì 0.4~40
50 6LC
I eoM ~O
I
1 00 AL ROCOSNE141.0 Retresh
r Tomo P 80,14, ocl Gi Tube
ed Tube 2 IDose
0130.10r ~.,roga
10 A` f &Oen

I0010
O AL. Tornoleack.VeTbne(rneCT LaetimageMelent>14

nuore 1.1~.(e> Ftl imenieeOpeeel
,
3 3114070H»
me. r
la ge

bel ane , .
,„ 1. 4 1 f BEC

C' r il
Oose
RADS
Receptot ___ 70 2.0 EI 12 ri r

p_15 t
r
start Ma

GenWere37 Gemuto, Udente &tisk. 7.0.4


0% ~v
Il 1171.R LIVI.F21.VW1w11=0

0100711 101.1.90112 I rr.,. pr, I I R.00011 1010100002


50 101001900
Ite«0, 13003.
ROPVIIM

100 Ak StAndby Ptp Gen.0$4. Rad tap. 1e00e1.0.

10

IIII I
AL I e» I
00101001...
0010313. _____________________
,„,„,
r amali
larde
Tochollee
9,
Mi r e 1 MEC

• r
Recto« N

1 1
•: Steli Ir np, 0001

210 / 671
R

1 8 / 5 0

211 / 671
Because the output signals of the tables are Oper collector- active low type, it is necessary
that, on the Indico 100 ROOM INTERFACE BOARD, the used inputs are set as follows:

SW1: Do not care

SW2: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW3: Do not care

SW4: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW5: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW6: Do not care

SW7: Short circuit pin 2 - 3

SW8: Do not care

212 / 671
19 / 50
20 / 50 213 / 671
7.6. CASTOR GENERATORS & CD1000 IMAGE SYSTEM INTERFACE

The CD1000 Image system can not be directly connected to the tables and it is necessary to
use the Mecall adaptation board p/n 00605.173.

It is anyhow possible to order specific CD1000 interface kit for each Castor generator
composed by a set of factory cables as detailed in the interface drawings SXX00S2101 and
SXX00S2201 using the following ordering codes:

RTA72 - CLISIS - CD1000 interface kit for CASTOR HF generator

RTA73 - CLISIS - CD1000 interface kit for CASTOR R generator

It is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3 and
detailed in the following figure:

214 / 671
21 / 50
215 / 671
C11-13 REQ FL/HCF
K1
1N4007
D1
FLUO RO CN164-1 1
M1.3
CN1 6 4 - 6

C11-1
M1.1 +24V dc
CN1 6 4 - 9
CN1 64 -1 3

C11-11
M1.4 ZOOM 1 CN1 64 -2 7

C11-23
M1.5 ZOOM 2 CN1 64 -2 6

C11-10
M1.6 ZOOM 3 CN1 64 -2 5

C11-12
M1.7 H - REV CN1 6 4 - 8

C11-24
M1.8 V - REV CN1 6 4 - 7

C11-5
M1.2 GND CN1 64 -1 5

D2 PREPARATION CN1 70 -1 0

1N
400 II STEP (GRAFIA) CN1 70 -2 8
7 Q1
C11-17 READY ACQ FL R2 R1 BD677 M
1.9 EXPOSURE CN1 70 -2 9

15K K1 R X- O N CN1 70 -3 0

10K M
1.10
C11-18 GND FLUORO AUTO/MANUAL CN1 70 -1 9

C11-6
M1.11 GENERATOR READY ( BUCKY START) CN1 70 -3 7

CN1 70 -1 6
C11-7
M1.12 TECH. #1 (SFD MODE)

ISCD 1000
TECH #3 (DIRECT) CN1 70 -1 7

INTERFAC
E BOARD CN1 7 0 - 4
IS CD 1000
p/n
006050.173
TO M O O N

TOMO TIME D0 CN1 70 -3 8


FLUORO ERROR ( - )

FLUORO ERROR ( + )

FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( - )

FLUORO TO GENERATOR ( + )
TOMO TIME D1 CN1 70 -2 2

TOMO TIME D2 CN170-2 1

TOMO TIME D3 CN1 70 -2 0

GND CN1 70 -1 4

CN1 70 -1 5

CLISIS TABLE
GTB422

GTB432
GTB429

GTB425

GTB319

GTB454

GTB444

GTB445

GTB113
GTB406

GTB428

GTB120

GTB447

GTB449
GTB112

GTB124

GTB448

GTB446

GTB119

GTB318
GTB401
GTB402

GTB405

CASTOR HF GENERATOR
NOTE OLD DRAWING N U MBER DATE VISA

REV.

DATE JUL Y 2005 CABLES TOLLERANCES FROM S/N T O S/ N

SIGN. DIMENSIONS < 0.5 mt. 0.5 - 2.0 mt. > 2.0 mt. 001 / 100

VISA TOLLERANCE -0/+0.5 cm / mt -0/+1 cm / mt -0/+4 cm / mt PAGE 1 OF 1

DESCRIPTION CODE REVISION


MECALL srl CLISIS - CASTOR HF & CD1000 INTERFACE
(KIT p/n RTA72) SXX00S2101
Via Negrelli, 55 - Lissone - Italy

This drawing is a property of MECALL srl and can not be reproduced or trans ferred to third parties
216 / 671
23 / 50
K1 D1
1N4007
C11-13 REQ FL/HCF FLUO RO CN164-1 1
M1.3
CN164-6
CN164-9
C11-1 M1.1
+24V dc CN1 64 -1 3

C11-11 M1.4
ZOOM 1 CN1 64 -2 7

C11-23 M1.5 ZOOM 2 CN1 64 -2 6

C11-10 M1.6 CN1 64 -2 5


ZOOM 3

M1.7
C11-12 H - REV CN164-8

C11-24 M1.8 CN164-7


V - REV

C11-5 M1.2
GND CN164-15

D2 PREPARATION CN1 70 -1 0

1N4007 II STEP (GRAFIA) CN1 70 -2 8

Q1 M1.9
EXPOSURE CN1 70 -2 9
C11-17 READY ACQ FL R2 BD677
R1
15K K1 M1.10 R X- O N CN1 70 -3 0

10K
C11-18 GND

C11-6
1.11 M GENERATOR READY ( BUCKY START) CN170-37

CN1 70 -1 6
C11-7
M1.1
2
TECH. #1 (SFD MODE)

TECH #3 (DIRECT) CN1 70 -1 7


C
D
10
IS CD 1000 IS IN
00 T
p/
E
TO M O O N CN170-4

n
R
0 TOMO TIME D0 CN1 70 -3 8
0 FLUORO ERROR ( - )

FLUORO ERROR ( + )

FLUORO TO GEN ERATOR ( - )

FLUORO TO GEN ERATOR ( + )


TOMO TIME D1 CN1 70 -2 2

TOMO TIM E D2 CN170-2 1

TOMO TIM E D3 CN1 70 -2 0

GND CN1 70 -1 4

CN1 70 -1 5

CLISIS TABLE
GTB114

GTB125
GTB118

GTB129

GTB104
GTB121
GTB119

GTB127

GTB222

GTB135

GTB132

GTB130
GTB104

GTB108

GTB207

GTB138

GTB113

GTB139

GTB206
GTB131

GTB221
GTB107

GTB105

CASTOR R GENERATOR
NOTE OLD DRAWING NUMBER DATE VISA

REV.

DATE JU LY 2005 CABLES TOLLERANCES FROM S/N TO S/N

SIGN. DIMENSIONS < 0.5 mt. 0.5 - 2.0 mt. > 2.0 mt. 001 / 100

VISA TOLLERANCE -0/+0.5 cm / mt -0/+1 cm / mt -0/+4 cm / mt PAGE 1 OF 1

DESCRIPTION CODE REVISION


MECALL srl CLISIS - CASTOR R & CD1000 INTERFACE
(KIT p/n RTA73) SXX00S2201
Via Negrelli, 55 - Lissone - Italy

This drawing is a property of MECALL srl and can not be reproduced or trans ferred to third parties
217 / 671
24 / 50
7.7. CASTOR GENERATOR & HIRIS DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSORS
INTERFACE

The table can be interfaced with a HIRIS Digital Image Processor only if the CASTOR HF
generator is equipped with the optional interface kit ref. GNA21. In particular the unit interface
circuit must be connected with the HIRIS interface board of the Castor HF generator that is
included in the GNA21 kit. The interconnection between the table and the CASTOR HF
generator must be realized using the optional interface cable ref. 002500.185-A

It is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3 and
detailed in the following figure:

The theory of operation in the different working modes


are: WORKING STATION 1

It must be associated with the use of the SFD mode. In this modality the HIRIS image
processor can acquire the images in the following modality:

Continuous fluoro

Fluoro request arrives from the Table by means of signal FLUORO (Led DL19 and COM.Rx
DL18) and it is transferred to Hiris processor as signal PFL. Hiris processor makes active
signal OFL+ (Led DL38) that, through U1, enters the generator as IFS (Led DL3). The
Generator starts the fluoro exposure and exposure time is given by OFT signal (Led DL31)
which is coming through U1 to the Hiris system as EXON (led DL17).

218 / 671
25 / 50
Pulsed fluoro

Before fluoro starts, Hiris must enable signal PHCF (Led DL33). Fluoro request comes from
the Superix table as FLUORO (Led DL19 e COM.Rx DL18) and U1 IC activates signal IFS
(Led DL3). At the end of preparation generator activates OBS signal (Led LD45) that comes,
through U1, to Hiris on GEN.READY (LedDL16). When Hiris is ready to acquire the images
drives low the potter reply OEXP+ (Led DL36) and IRP signals (Led DL4); every active potter
reply signal lets generator to expose and feedback using OPT (Led DL32) which is translated
by U1 in EXON (led DL17).

Radio (SPOT)

Radio request enters the generator via I_ST signal (Led DL43), that is transformed by U1 in
IPR (Led DL1). Second Step enters directly on ISR (Led DL2). At the end of preparation
generator activates OBS signal (Led DL45) that is sent to the remote table on BUC_ST (Led
DL12). The table, when ready, activates signal rx.GEN (Led DL39) that is transformed by U1
on IRP (Led DL4). During exposure time generator activates signal ORT (Led DL30) which is
transformed by U1 in X- RAY (Led DL13).

WORKING STATION 2
This working station enables the SPOT mode of the HIRIS Digital Image processor and
disables the use of SFD. If the Hiris system is equipped with the DSA package, the contrast
media injector can be triggered by the Hiris CPU and the generator interlocks the exposure
considering the actual status of the injector and the modality selected by the operator on the
Hiris menu. In particular, the different modalities supported in this working station are the
following:

Continuous fluoro
Fluoro request arrives from the Superix Table by means of signal FLUORO (Led DL19 and
COM.Rx DL18) and it is transferred to Hiris processor as signal PFL. Hiris processor makes
active sinal OFL+ (Led DL38) that, through U1, enters the generator as IFS (Led DL3). The
Generator starts the fluoro exposure and exposure time is given by OFT signal (Led DL31)
which is coming through U1 to the Hiris system as EXON (led DL17).

Pulsed fluoro
Before fluoro starts, Hiris must enable signal PHCF (Led DL33). Fluoro request comes from
the Superix table as FLUORO (Led DL19 e COM.Rx DL18) and U1 IC activates signal IFS
(Led DL3). At the end of preparation generator activates OBS signal (Led LD45) that comes,
through U1, to Hiris on GEN.READY (LedDL16). When Hiris is ready to acquire the images
drives low the potter reply OEXP+ (Led DL36) and IRP signals (Led DL4); every active potter
reply signal lets generator to expose and feedback using OPT (Led DL32) which is translated
by U1 in EXON (led DL17).

SPOT MODE (RADIO & ANGIOGRAPHIC SEQUENCES)


In spot mode, the images can be acquired under three different modalities:

Standard spot mode.


Angiographic sequence. The operator has selected a pre-programmed sequence in which
the operator has defined the trigger conditions for the contrast media injector (Injector
enabled/disabled, injector start (delayed or anticipated from the first exposure)
The CASTOR HF CPU interlocks the exposures releases with the status of the injector, if the
use of the injector has been enabled by the HIRIS processor via the INJ.ENA (Led DL37)
signal (active=enabled). In particular:

220 / 671
26 / 50

221 / 671
Injetor Disabled (Led DL37 off):
Radio request enters the generator via I_ST signal (Led DL43), that is transformed by U1 in
IPR (Led DL1) and in P_PREP_G (Led DL20) and in COM.rx (Led DL18).
Second Step enters directly on ISR (Led DL2). At the end of preparation generator activates
OBS signal (Led DL45) that is sent to the HIRIS processor on RAD (Led DL15). The HIRIS
processor, when ready, activates signal OEXP+ (Led DL36) that is transformed by U1 on IRP
(Led DL4). During exposure time generator activates signal ORT (Led DL30) which is
transformed by U1 in EXON (Led DL17).
Injector Enabled (Led DL37 on):
The HIRIS processor enables the injector via INJ.ENA (Led DL37).
Radio request enters the generator via I_ST signal (Led DL43), that is transformed by U1 in
IPR (Led DL1). Second Step enters directly on ISR (Led DL2) and in P_PREP_G (Led DL20)
and in COM.rx (Led DL18) only in case the INJ.ARM (active high) or ARM_0 (ac tive Low)
signals are active.
At the end of preparation generator activates OBS signal (Led DL45) that is sent to the HIRIS
processor on RAD (Led DL15). The HIRIS processor, when ready, activates signal OEXP+
(Led DL36) that is transformed by U1 on IRP (Led DL4). During exposure time generator
activates signal ORT (Led DL30) which is transformed by U1 in EXON (Led DL17).
During the exposures sequence, if the injector has been switched in manual trigger mode
(AUT/MAN =active high or MAN_0 =active low) and signal STR/MAN is active high or siganl
STR_0 is active low, U1 allows the injector to start via signal STR_INJ (Led DL49).
if the injector has been switched in automatic trigger mode (AUT/MAN =active low or MAN_0
=active high) the injector start signal INJ.START (LED DL46) generated by the HIRIS
processor allows the injector to start via signal STR_INJ (Led DL49).
TOMOGRAPHY
The tomo mode is enabled by the operator at the Unit console and this selection is transferred
to the CASTOR HF generator via TOMO signal (Led DL45) that is transformed by U1 in
TOMO_C (Led DL14) for the HIRIS processor. In the same time and signals PBx (Led DL5)
ITA, ITS, ITF are generated by the interface logic for the CASTOR HF CPU. When the signal
T_On (ITA) is active, the generator automatically sets the exposure back_up time depending
on the status of signals ITS and ITF as indicated in the following table:

WORKING STATION 3
It must be associated with the Unit DIRECT mode. Selecting this working station fluoroscopy
is disabled and the operator can release exposures using a film cassette external to the SFD.

Radiography

Radio request enters the generator via I_ST signal (Led DL43), that is transformed by U1 in
IPR (Led DL1). Second Step enters directly on ISR (Led DL2). At the end of preparation
generator activates OBS signal (Led DL45) that, through U1, is sent back to IRP (Led DL4).

222 / 671
27 / 50
28 / 50 224 / 671
7.8. DEIMOS GENERATOR & HIRIS DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSORS INTERFACE
The table can be interfaced with a HIRIS Digital Image Processor only if the INDICO 100
generator is equipped with the optional ATS HIRIS interface. It is also necessary to order the
specific RTA65 HIRIS interface kit for INDICO100 generator. The kit is composed of a set of
interface cables and the interconnection circuit is indicated in the interface drawing ref. RTA65. It
is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3 and
detailed in the following figure:

The ATS Hiris interface option


includes a custom Table Digital Interface (TDI) board (assembly 73689400) with DB25pin
connector to interface to the ATS Hiris system.
ATS Hiris Name Description Generator Generator TDI Board LED
Designation TDI Board
Reference
ATS Hiris INPUTS (Generator Outputs)
CM6.29 +24Vg Interface Power J2-13 N/A
CM8.7
CM6.15 0Vg Interface Power Return J2-25 N/A
CM6.10
CM8.19
LED25 CM6.11 REQ_FL/HCF Fluoro Request (Continuous or Pulsed) J2-1 DS27
LED26 CM6.30 PREP_RAD/CINE Prep Request J2-14 DS29
LED27 CM6.12 REQ_RAD/CINE Exposure Request J2-2 DS31
LED28 CM6.31 COM_REQ Exposure Safety Interlock J2-15 DS33
LED31 CM6.14 TOMO Tomo Select J2-3 DS35
LED54 CM8.23 GEN.READY Generator Ready J2-16 DS36
LED60 CM8.21 EX.ON Exposure On J2-4 DS37
LED32 CM6.33 SEL.ANGIO STEP Table Step Select J2-17 DS39
ATS Hiris OUTPUTS (Generator Inputs)
LED47 CM6.22 STEP Step Table J2-5 DS25
LED50 CM6.2 TIMEC_0 Cine Time Select 0 J2-18 DS26
LED51 CM6.20 TIMEC_1 Cine Time Select 1 J2-6 DS28
LED52 CM6.1 TIMEC_2 Cine Time Select 2 J2-19 DS30
LED62 CM8.1 SEL.HCF High Contrast Fluoro Select J2-7 DS32
LED64 CM8.2 SEL.CINE Cine Select J2-20 DS34
LED65 CM8.15 RATE0 Rate for Pulsed Fluoro, Cine, Serial Rad J2-8 DS38
LED66 CM8.3 RATE1 Rate for Pulsed Fluoro, Cine, Serial Rad J2-21 DS40
LED67 CM8.16 RATE2 Rate for Pulsed Fluoro, Cine, Serial Rad J2-9 DS41
LED68 CM8.4 RATE3 Rate for Pulsed Fluoro, Cine, Serial Rad J2-22 DS43
LED70 CM8.17 READY_ACQ_RAD/ Order Exposure for Rad/Cine/HCF J2-12 DS42
CINE/HCF
LED71 CM8.5 READY_ACQ_FL Order Fluoro Exposure J2-24 DS44
CM8.12 PH.LIGHT_ERROR ABS Error signal J2-10 N/A

225 / 671
29 / 50

226 / 671
THEORY OF OPERATION
GENERAL

The Generator TDI board contains an additional set of inputs and outputs used to interface to the
ATS Hiris Digital Imaging system.

The TDI board inputs and outputs are only activated via software when the selected Receptor is
programmed for operation with the ATS Hiris (Interface Option = 14 or 15).

When the ATS Receptor is selected on the Generator Console, the Generator default will be
locked in to the AEC mode. The Film Screen, AEC Fields, and Density displays / buttons will also
be disabled as the exposure start and stop will be controlled via the ATS system thus these
functions are not required.

The Generators optional High Level Fluoro and Pulsed Fluoro modes shall also be disabled when
the ATS Receptor is selected. These Fluoro modes are replaced with a Low Level Fluoro and
High Contrast Fluoro mode controlled via the ATS system.

ATS HIRIS INPUTS (GENERATOR OUTPUT) SIGNALS

FLUORO REQUEST (REQFL/HCF)

The Fluoro Request (REQ_FL/HCF) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris
system. The Generator will activate REQ_FL/HCF signal when the Fluoro exposure input is
enabled (Fluoro footswitch pressed) in both conventional and HCF modes. The REQ_FL/HCF
output signal is available on J2-1.

PREP REQUEST (PREPRAD/CINE)

The Prep Request (PREP_RAD/CINE) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris
system. The Generator will activate PREP_RAD/CINE signal when the Prep input is enabled
(Prep button pushed) for both Radiographic and Cine exposures. The PREP_RAD/CINE output
signal is available on J2-14.

EXPOSURE REQUEST (REQRAD/CINE)

The Exposure Request (REQ_RAD/CINE) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris
system. The Generator will activate REQ_RAD/CINE signal when the X-ray input is enabled (X-
ray button pushed) for both Radiographic and Cine exposures. The REQ_RAD/CINE output
signal is available on J2-2.

EXPOSURE SAFETY INTERLOCK (COMREQ)

The Exposure Safety Interlock (COM_REQ) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS
Hiris system. The Generator will activate COM_REQ when either PREP_RAD/CINE or
REQ_FL/HCF outputs are active. The COM_REQ output signal is available on J2-15.

TOMO SELECT (TOMO)

The Tomo Select (TOMO) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris system. The
Generator will activate TOMO when the Generator is in a Tomo mode of operation. The TOMO
output signal is available on J2-3.

227 / 671
30 / 50

228 / 671
GENERATOR READY (GEN.READY)

The Generator Ready (GEN.READY) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris
system. The Generator will activate GEN.READY when the Generator is ready to take an HCF
exposure. The GEN.READY output signal is available on J2-16.

EXPOSURE ON (EX.ON)

The Exposure On (EX.ON) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS Hiris system. The
Generator will activate EX.ON when x-rays are on in both Radiographic and Fluoro modes. The
EX.ON output signal is available on J2-4.

TABLE STEP SELECT (SEL.ANGIO STEP)

The Table Step Select (SEL.ANGIO STEP) is an output signal from the Generator to the ATS
Hiris system. The Generator will activate SEL.ANGIO STEP when the Generators Table Step
mode is enabled. The SEL.ANGIO STEP output signal is available on J2-17. Note: Table Step
mode is an optional Generator feature.

ATS HIRIS OUTPUT (GENERATOR INPUT) SIGNALS

STEP TABLE (STEP)

The Step Table (STEP) is an output signal from the ATS Hiris system to the Generator. When the
Generator is in Table Step mode, the STEP signal is used to select the next set of parameters in
the Generator Table Step list. The STEP input signal is available on J2-5. Note: Table Step mode
is an optional Generator feature.

CINE TIME SELECT 0,1,2 (TIMEC_0,1,2)

The Cine Time Select 0,1,2 (TIMEC_0,1,2) are output signals from the ATS Hiris system to the
Generator. When the Generator is in Cine mode, the TIMEC_0,1,2 signal are used by the
Generator to determine the Cine exposure time as per the following table:

Pulse Length
4ms 5ms 6ms 7ms 8ms 9ms 10ms 12ms
TIMEC 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
_0
TIMEC 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
_1
TIMEC- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
2

The TIMEC_0,1,2 input signals are available on J2-18,6,19. Note: Cine mode is an optional
Generator feature.

HIGH CONTRAST FLUORO SELECT (SEL.HCF)

The High Contrast Fluoro Select (SEL.HCF) is an output signal from the ATS Hiris system to the
Generator. When the SEL.HCF signal is enabled, the Generator shall operate in High Contrast
Fluoro mode, with mA ranging from 10 to 50mA, when a Fluoro exposure is taken. The Fluoro
exposure pulses shall be controlled by the ATS Hiris via the READY_ACQ_RAD/CINE/HCF
signal. The SEL.HCF input signal is available on J2-7.

229 / 671
31 / 50
CINE SELECT

The Cine Select (SEL.CINE) is an output signal from the ATS Hiris system to the Generator.
When the SEL.CINE signal is enabled, the Generator shall operate in Cine exposure mode.
When Cine mode is active, the Console will display the maximum allowed Cine run time in the
lower right hand corner of the LCD based on the TIMEC_X and RATEX inputs. The SEL.CINE
input signal is available on J2-20. Note: Cine mode is an optional Generator feature.

RATE FOR PULSED FLUORO, CINE, SERIAL RAD (RATE0,1,2,3)

The Rate for Pulsed Fluoro, Cine, Serial Rad (RATE0,1,2,3) are output signals from the ATS Hiris
system to the Generator. When the Generator is in Cine mode, the RATE0,1,2,3 signal are used
by the Generator to determine the Cine exposure rate as per the following table:

SERIAL RADIOGRAPHY RATES


Single 0.5/s 1/s 2/s 3/s 6/s 10/s 15/s 30/s
RATE 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
0
RATE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1
RATE 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
2
RATE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
3

CINE RATES
15/s 30/s 60/s
RATE 1 0 1
0
RATE 1 0 0
1
RATE 1 0 0
2
RATE 0 1 1
3

The RATE0,1,2,3 input signals are available on J2-8,21,9,22. Note: Cine mode is an optional
Generator feature.

ORDER EXPOSURE FOR RAD/CINE/HCF (READYACQRAD/CINE/HCF)

The Order Exposure for RAD/CINE/HCF (READY_ACQ_RAD/CINE/HCF) is an output signal


from the ATS Hiris system to the Generator. The READY_ACQ_RAD/CINE/HCF is used to
control the start and stop of exposures in the Radiographic, Cine and HCF exposure modes. If the
READY_ACQ_RAD/CINE/HCF is active in the standby state, the Generator shall indicate an
“EXP_SW” error (error code 62). The READY_ACQ_RAD/CINE/HCF input signal is available on
J2-12.

ORDER FLUORO EXPOSURE (READYACQFL)

The Order Fluoro Exposure (READY_ACQ_FL) is an output signal from the ATS Hiris system to
the Generator. The READY_ACQ_FL is used to control the start and stop of continuous Fluoro
exposures. If the READY_ACQ_FL is active for a period exceeding 10 seconds after a Fluoro
exposure has be terminated, the Generator shall indicate a “REC TIMEOUT” error (error code
27). If the READY_ACQ_FL signal is active in the standby state, the Generator shall indicate an
“EXP_SW” error (error code 62). The READY_ACQ_FL input signal is available on J2-24.

231 / 671
32 / 50

232 / 671
ABS ERROR SIGNAL (PH.LIGHTERROR)

The ABS Error Signal (PH.LIGHT_ERROR) is an analogue output signal from the ATS Hiris
system to the Generator. The PH.LIGHT_ERROR signal is a ±10VDC analogue signal that is
proportional to Dose with 0VDC being the correct Dose value. The Generator uses this input to
regulate the Fluoro kV/mA when ABS mode is enabled. Note that in the Fluoro Setup mode,
NOMIMAL DOSE = 0 for the Generator to properly stabilize using the PH.LIGHT_ERROR signal.
The PH.LIGHT_ERROR analogue input signal is available on J2-10.

In addition, the generator active receptors must be configured as follows:

Working station 1 (technique selection 1): Fluoro and SFD mode;

33 / 50
233 / 671
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER:
For a proper operation of the Hiris / ESI CD image processor, the Indico 100 ABS
circuit must be configured as follows:

234 / 671
34 / 50

235 / 671
Working station 2 (technique selection 2): Image processor operation. SFD is disabled

onWare37Geni/talcoIPIIIINCWinottlon7.0.4
Scb.o

Il1511WEliN112.11911214111.181;,

eN
25 5.1 M M M1
9 1 I , 1~.1 li0t4910,3 1,001910,1 170<eCInq

70 -P e
. ..9.
1
L'a
I ."•as an.at

100 P Rentetine.
r Torr. R tenal r py
.1.411.4.1114t
7. 0 1
L
L:r
20 77 P.. r ~3 1' a. e t.«2

O Terne(005PoPmeent.)104100

70F437011311007HG7 1114e1.oe0p11.4 Fr-


Fec.,

E E """
E
TeclenIque
6EC

.11
ceplei

2
"1":1 e o

fonWartal04m/talco(IIIIIIMI.4tIon7.0.4
Re uar 5.7w

Il11"rIlhtlIINK11.211911M,Ata1cIl

RecepaScau,

70 Ei=112:1111=E1=111:=
1E311~ II=11
100 lingby ••••• 1.17. ~M6.
Ia"..J
Mal ~I

20 P^",
WZIZ3
M Mal
Mal ~l ~I
-

-
6 E . = '
- - -
M
E = ~ M
M
Canal I=7=
f. nqe M
,„ Teclmlque
mA r égC

Hrtrpto

T
Start
5
"eO
3
a mierogaftwaa•.... 11§4ernagaltalwat...
ra

IonWee37<ihnetalorUtIIII0C114.bn7.0.4
Re LO, 5.7w 7505.7.Ry

Il1.":1(.1 Eilail.A.21911111Mg13,1

70-à`
100 dbk la/odto ..,Peerey rml t.7.
804005

20
0*

E m P l
Nea
Nanniqu•
en, rnt.kg

I4II5LajIILAII f .

start " C C

3 5 / 5 0
236 / 671
Working station 3 (technique selection 3): Direct exposures. Fluoro and SFD are not enabled

reb
trbe 1

70
100 Tube.*
« Tubo I
C Tub02
20
mv O Tp.‹,ego,.voTim.(n.).[WO Ur11.1190 r101~ [411
fluoc01..20.0,<4Y 10 ffi InleetWe OPtan'l
ret11.1 ffirunden.1 00..1
1

rbpa
lichnique
.•m8 r my r ege

Fluoreseopy
r

132_2_1
4111111
_ lB art eP madtvmd•rim...

VanWa.37 V.Inarelor UlitilNa Rorbion 7.0A


rde Ozt.
il ,2.

70
awebi P. , Gn ft,N
100 Eoeen
_ E = 1 = 1 _ 1 = 1
20 M I M M :
_ ~ _ ~ _ ~
NN O
Feeen
r

mi=
Tenhnique
larga
ama=
BEC

IlmSaran

— —
Deo
2 Re<rpro.

j H
« H re
ra re
_4 r.
e, start a e (,) eite. be.324r.a.

GanWa..37Gar.ordo, Ulititiva R•viOvn 7.0.1


Tbetitr 5ct.0 05«en I1

1,911.1-1 GLA2.11121191711-z11=12,1

70
100
20
Or N O

ictisrtarpaf
e
mal

E Te( II qUe
.11


r •

237 / 671
Because the output signals of the tables are Open collector- active low type, it is necessary that,
on the Indico 100 ROOM INTERFACE BOARD, the used inputs are set as follows:

SW1: Do not care

SW2: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW3: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW4: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW5: Short circuit pin 6 - 8

SW6: Do not care

SW7: Short circuit pin 2 - 3

SW8: Do not care

37 / 50
238 / 671
239 / 671
38 / 50

240 / 671
7.9. DEIMOS GENERATOR & PLATINUM ONE IMAGE PROCESSOR INTERFACE

The table can be interfaced with a PLATINUM ONE Digital Image Processor only if the INDICO
100 generator is equipped with the optional Infimed interface board.
It is also necessary to order the specific GNA34.6 INFIMED interface kit for INDICO100
generator. The kit is composed of the set of interface cables as hereinafter described:

Image Intensifier power supply 006050.133


Clisis Image Intensifier interface cable 002500.349
Image Intensifier PWS cable 002500.140
Indico – Platinum One ABS cable 002500.377
Indico – Platinum One Photodiode cable 002500.378
Indico – serial line cable 002500.379
Indico – Comet solid state detector cable 002500.380
Indico – Clisis console cable 002500.381
Indico – Clisis interface cable 002500.382

It is also necessary that the installer set the configuration switches SW6, SW2 and SW3 and
detailed in the following figure:

The Platinum One interface option includes a custom Table Digital Interface (TDI II) board
(assembly 00738947 00) with direct RJ45 and RJ11 connections to the Infimed GIM unit as
described in the related documentation of Appendix 1.

In addition the generator must be equipped with the Universal AEC board p/n 734654 that allow
the connection of the Linos Optics photo diode AND the solid state Comet AEC detector used for
SFD operation.

The installer must carry out the calibration instructions as detailed in the Infimed Service manual
and in the Indico 100 service manual.

241 / 671
39 / 50
BACK

CN1001

COM#1
62-521-G1
e

l
i
SAFETY CHAIN SWITCH DOOR SWITCH OOM REMERGENCY

400V 3-PHASE LINE IN


ANGOLARI E LINEARI

Indc
io10

CN12

KEYBOARD
GEOMETRICHE

ls
u
iC
e
b
a
c
y
pM
R
E
W
O
P
rw
o I
L
A
R
T
U
E
N
8

DISTRIBUTION BOX
MOUSE

GIM
Clisis cable ground
C
A
B
L

T
B
2

INTE 0-PL ATINUMO


cod.cabe
ltacefInC
-rOD
1IN
TB 0N
C1C LISIS0250.382
127
DVI 1
I0
L
A
C
E
M
/N
P D
N
U
O
R
G
LOOP
CABLE p/n
(OR )QUIVALENTE ANY
7

cod. Generator cable SWP 002500.149

RFA
TOUCH SCREEN

USB#1
CONSOLE

CEC
USB#2

001 CODIIN GENERATOR

USB PS2 CAMERA


Clisis CAN to USB converter

Generator CAN to USB converter


INDICO 100 SERIAL CABLE p/n 002500.379

CN170
N101

ONEPLATINUM

UNIT INTERFACE 51P

cod. 006050.133

H.V. cables (GIM)

yaetsf & Thermal FAN P01-P02-P03-P04


E p/n 068-113
CN1008

ROOM 80PP21- cable odenA


CLISIS CONSOLE

FLUORO-EXPOSURE FOOTPEDAL
CN1002

ROOMEXAMINATION cable ubeground T LINE IN


CN1022
CN1004
CN1005
Prep / Exp
Optional
pushbutton

Consolle
cable X-ray
interlock c
PWS and
emerg
Ground cable
data 06/2008

finitura
visto

trattamento

COMETSOLIDSTATEDETECTOR

CCD CAMERA CABLE (LVDS

AECphoto-diodecablep/n002500.378
CLISIS - Image Intensifier Interface cable cod. 002500.349
firma L.M.L.

CPU BOARDp/n CABLE 068-113 OUT#1 LINE


4
JT
B2
CN16
4C
ABL
EG
IM
cablep/n002500.380

cable 726-456-

INSULATIONJ1 73457302 B
n. dis.
243 / 671

data

G1)

J7J1CN4CN3p/n

COMPUTERDVIJ1
gruppo

modifica

p/n CABLE 068-113 J2 J11 TRANSFORMERService port (RS232)


Q.ta'

OUT#2 UNIT LINE


1

BOARDDAP

55990072 B J4
REFERENCEC
1 di 1
n. dis.

p/n cable 002500.155 acutecV DAP OUT#3 LINE


J1 J2
scala
apparecchio

CLISIS
Genera
denominazione CODICE

Tollera
SXX00S4301
nz
CLISIS - INDICO 100 - PLATINUM ONE SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
Questo disegno e' di propieta' della MECALL s.r.l. Ogni riproduzione o concessione a terzi ne e' pertanto interdetta a termini di legge.

40 / 50

244 / 671
245 / 671
41 / 50

246 / 671
+ 24 V I B CN4-1
D1

CN1. 1 F2
CN4-2
1N 4007 +24V IB
BR1
IC2
CN1.2 - + 1 2
VIN VOUT
+ 24 V I B RL1

GND
R3 7
120 LD1 6
L M 7 8 24 5 ZOOM 1 CN5-1
+24V AUX

3
2
C3 C4 D2
3
C1 C2 C11 + 4 ZOOM 1 C N 4 -3
+ + PT2 1
C9 0.1uF 22uF
R1 8
1N 4007
0.1uF 1000uF 100 0u F 2 K + 50V
50V 50V 3K3 30.22
100uF
35V RL2
R4 7
6
1K5 5 ZOOM 2 C N 5 -2
CN6. 1 2
3
4 ZOOM 2 C N 4 -4
1
8

30.22
CN3. 1 ZOOM 1
RL3
7
CN3.2 ZOOM 2 6
5 ZOOM 3 C N 5 -3
CN3.3 ZOOM 3 2
3
4 ZOOM 3 C N 4 -5
CN3.4 H REV 1
8

CN3.5 V REV 30.22


RL4
7
6
CN3.6 COMMON ZOOM 5

SW1 2
3 + 24V AUX 3
CN3.7 COMMON REV 2 4 H REV C N 5 -4
1 1
8

30.22

RL5
7
6
5

2
D3 3
F4 4 C N 5 -5
CN2. 1 1
1N 4007
+24V AUX 8
BR2 IC1
30.22 C N 5 -6
CN2.2 - + 1 2
+ 24V AUX
VIN VOUT
GND

R5 C N 5 -7
L M 7 8 24 120 LD2
3

C7 C8 D4
C5 C6 C12 +
+ + R6
1K5 C10 0.1uF 100uF 1N 4007 R2
0.1uF 1000uF 100 0u F + 50V
3K3 OLDDRAWINGNUMBER ARG00S1401
50V 50V NOTE DATE VISA
100uF
PT1 35V
REV.
2K

D AT E M AY 2 0 0 0 CABLES TOLLERANCES FROM S/N TO S/N


CN7. 1
SING. DIMENSION < 0.5 mt. 0.5 - 2.0 mt. > 0.2 mt. 079

VISA TOLLERANCE -0/+0.5 cm / mt. -0/+1 cm / mt. -0/+4 cm / mt. PAGE 1 OF 1


DESCRIPTION CODE REVISION
MECALL srl BD TABLE - 24V DC POWER SUPPLY
TSHT0S 1301
Via Negrelli, 55 - Lissone - Italy

This drawing is a property of MECALL srl and can not be reproduced or transferred to third parties
247 / 671
42 / 50
22000
4
1 2 3 678
4
5

TO: 006050.133 CN4 TO: I.I. CONNECTOR


FR: I.I. CONNECTOR FR: 006050.133 CN4
CBL:002500.140 CBL:002500.140

PIN 1

CABLE END "A" CABLE END "B"


PIN 1

FROM: CABLE END "A" 006050.133 CN4 TO: CABLE END "B" I.I. CONNECTOR
NO. SIGNAL sqmm 8 002227.016 1 SHELL 15P 45°
NAME LEAD LGTH STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION LEAD STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION 7 001740.006 5 AMP CANNON FEMALE
LGTH
1 II +24V 2X0,15 30 3 002331.178 1 30 3 002331.058 15 6 002331.058 1 AMP CANNON FEMALE 15P SNAP-IN
2 II 24V RTN 2 8 5 001791.171 1 CABLE, 10 CONDUCTOR 0,15sqmm
3 MAG. 1 3 14 4 003145.001 2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL
4 MAG. 2 4 6 3 002227.004 1 SHELL 9P
5 MAG. 3 2X0,15 30 3 002331.178 5 30 3 002331.058 13 2 001740.006 5 AMP CANNON FEMALE PIN
1 002331.178 1 AMP CANN0N FEMALE 9P SNAP-IN
ITEM PART NO. QTY DESCRIPTION
trattamento scala

data modifica
finitura

data 12/3/99
firma L.M.L. CABINET 1 1 di 1 RT/RL
< 0.5 mt 0.5 - 2 mt > 2
mt NOTE : IN THE ORDERING CODE PLEASE SUBSTITUTE _LLL_ WITH visto n. dis. gruppo Q.ta' n. dis. apparecchio

248 / 671
DIMENSIONI THE CABLE LENGHT ( mt ) denominazione CODICE
eran

Gen
erali
Toll

-0/+0.5 cm -0/+1 cm/mt -0/+4 cm/mt INFIMED I.I. POWER SUPPLY CABLE 002500.140_LLL
ze

TOLLERANZE
Questo disegno e' di propieta' della MECALL s.r.l. Ogni riproduzione o concessione a terzi ne e' pertanto interdetta a termini di legge.

43 / 50

249 / 671
44 / 50 250 / 671
251 / 671
45 / 50
25000
100
6 6
4 1 30 34
12
TO: J4 - AEC PCB TO: PHOTO DIODE
FR: PHOTO DIODE FR: J4 - AEC PCB
5 CBL: 002500.378 CBL: 002500.378 PHOTODIODE
7 8
5 pin 1
2 7
Ø4 CABLE END "B"
CABLE END "A" 400

SHIELD PREPARATION

8 001740.012 1 WIRE TERMINAL RFM4 - Ø4 - RED


FROM: CABLE END "A" J4 - AEC PCB TO: CABLE END "B" PHOTO DIODE 7 001791.014 1 CABLE, 1 x 1 sqmm G/Y
NO. SIGNAL NAME sqmm _ 6 003145.001 2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL
LEAD LGTH STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION LEAD LGTH STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION
5 002067.708 1 TUBING, HEATSHRINK Ø6.4
1 +Vcc 0.25 30 3 001740.113 4 30 3 002331.280 1 4 001740.118 4 FEMALE CONTACT SZH-002T-P0.5 for ZHR-6 CONNECTOR
2 SIGNAL 0.25 30 3 001740.113 12 30 3 002331.280 3 3 002331.280 1 ZHR-6 CONNECTOR
3 -Vcc 0.25 30 3 001740.113 5 30 3 002331.280 4 2 001740.113 4 TERMINAL WIRE PKD 508
4 0V 0.25 30 3 001740.113 7 30 3 002331.280 2 1 001791.185 1 6x0.25mmq SHILDED CABLE ( 15mt )
5 SHIELD 0.25 30 3 001740.012 ITEM PART NO. QTY DESCRIPTION

Modifiche
RevataD

descrizione modifica Firma


trattamento finitura scala

data 05/01/2006
firma DC 1 1 di 1 INDICO
visto n. dis. gruppo Q.ta' n. dis. apparecchio
DIMENSIONI < 0.5 mt 0.5 - 2 mt > 2 mt Denominazione disegno n° Rev

252 / 671
Gener
Toller
anze
TOLLERANZE -0/+0.5 cm -0/+1 cm/mt -0/+4 cm/mt INDICO - PLATINUM ONE PHOTODIODE CABLE 002500.378
Questo disegno e' di propieta' della MECALL s.r.l. Ogni riproduzione o concessione a terzi ne e' pertanto interdetta a termini di legge.

46 / 50

253 / 671
3 6 7
PI N 1 1 2 3 PIN 1
5
5

TO: 06050.171 - CN1008 TO: ADVANTEC


FR: COMPUTER FR: 06050.171 - CN1008
CBL: 002500.379 4 CBL: 002500.379

CABLE END "A" CABLE END "B"

SULLA PCB 006050.171 RIMUOVERE R47,L2,IC8,TZ7,TZ10

FROM: CABLE END "A" 06050.171 - CN1008 TO: ADVANTEC


NO. SIGNAL NAME sqmm
LEAD LGTH STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION LEAD LGTH STRIP LGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION 7 001740.005 3 AMP CANNON MALE PIN
1 RS232 - Tx 0,5 50 3 002331.177 7 20 3 002331.178 3 6 002331.177 1 AMP CANNON MALE 9P SNAP-IN
2 RS232 - Rx 0,5 50 3 002331.177 2 20 3 002331.178 2 5 003145.001 2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL
3 GND 0,5 50 3 002331.177 3 20 3 002331.178 5 4 001791.040 1 CABLE, 4 CONDUCTOR 0.5 sqmm
3 002227.004 1 SHELL 9P
2 001740.006 3 AMP CANNON FEMALE PIN
1 002331.178 1 AMP CANNON FEMALE 9P SNAP-IN
ITEM PART NO. QTY DESCRIPTION
tr att am ent o s c al a

dat a m od if ic a
f initur a

dat a 22/7/2001
firma L.M.L. 1 1 di 1 INDICO
vis to gruppo Q.ta' n. dis app ar ec c hio
n. dis.
< 0.5 mt 0.5 - 2 mt > 2 mt denominazione CODICE
Toleranze
Generail

-0/+0.5 cm -0/+1 cm/mt -0/+4 cm/mt INDICO - ADVANTEC SERIAL CABLE 002500.379
Questo disegno e' di propieta' della MECALL s.r.l. Ogni riproduzione o concessione a terzi ne e' pertanto interdetta a termini di legge.

254 / 671
47 / 50
255 / 671
256 / 671
48 / 50

257 / 671
258 / 671
49 / 50
15000
200
100
1
4 7
12
1 23 4 4
1
2
TO: CLISIS - CN170 5 TO: INDICO GENERATOR
FR: INDICO GENERATOR FR: CLISIS - CN170 5
CBL:002500.382 CBL:002500.382
TB1 7
6 9

1
PIN 1 12
12
CABLE END "A"
4
7

CABLE END "B"


ROOM INTERFACE BOARD : LIVE CONTACT POSITION FOR JW1 TO JW5, JW7 JUMPER PIN 1-2 AND 3-4
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD : JW10,JW14,SW15 JUMPER PIN 1-2 AND 3-4 SW21 JUMPER PIN 1-2
CLISIS MAIN BOARD 006050.172 : SW10 POS 3
II INTERFACE 006050.133 : SW1 POS 1-2

SIGNAL NAME sqmm FROM: CABLE END "A" TO: CLISIS - CN170 TO: CABLE END "B" INDICO GENERATOR
NO.
LEADLGTH STRIPLGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION LEADLGTH STRIPLGTH TERMINATION DESTINATION
1 ACC1 0,15 30 3 002331.064 16 100 3 001740.113 TB2-12
2 ACC2 0,15 30 3 002331.064 35 100 3 001740.113 TB2-1
3 ACC3 0,15 30 3 002331.064 17 100 3 001740.113 TB1-12
4 ACC4 0,15 30 3 002331.064 18 100 3 001740.113 TB1-1 7 001740.113 12 TERMINAL WIRE PKD 508
5 EXPOSURE 0,15 30 3 002331.064 29 100 3 001740.113 TB2-4,TB3-6 6 002067.703 1 TUBING ,HEATSHRINK PCE 250 O.R.
6 PREPARATION 0,15 30 3 002331.064 10 100 3 001740.113 TB6-7 5 001791.181 1 CABLE, 37 CONDUCTOR 0.34 sqmm
7 2nd STEP 0,15 30 3 002331.064 28 100 3 001740.113 TB6-9 4 003145.001 2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL
8 FLUORO 0,15 30 3 002331.064 11 100 3 001740.113 TB6-5 3 002227.015 1 SHELL 50P
9 EXP-ON +24V 0,15 30 3 002331.064 36 100 3 001740.113 TB6-2 2 001740.005 13 AMP CANNON FEMALE PIN
10 EXP-ON GND 0,75 30 3 002331.064 30 200 3 001740.113 TB6-1 1 002331.064 1 AMP CANNON FEMALE 50P SNAP-IN
11 GEN-READY 0,75 30 3 002331.064 37 200 3 001740.113 TB3-12 ITEM PART NO. QTY DESCRIPTION
trattamento scala
12 TOMO SELECT 0,75 30 3 002331.064 4 200 3 001740.113 TB3-4
13 GND GEN. 0,75 30 3 002331.064 14 200 3 001740.113 TB4-7 data modifica
finitura

data 2-9-2007
firma L.M.L. CLISIS 1 1 di 1 CLISIS
<
0.5 mt 0.5 - 2
mt >mt
2 visto n. dis. gruppo Q.ta' n. dis. apparecchio
Tolleranz

Generali

DIMENSIONI denominazione
CODIC
TOLLERANZE -0/+0.5 cm -0/+1 cm/mt -0/+4 cm/mt E
e

Questo disegno e' di propieta' della MECALL s.r.l. Ogni riproduzione o concessione
CLISIS a terzi ne e' pertanto
- INDICO interdetta a termini
INTERFACE di legge.
CABLE

259 / 671
50 / 50

260 / 671
8. UNIT START-UP & SOFTWARE CALIBRATIONS
8.1. UNIT FUNCTIONAL CHECK

Before appreciable operation of the system, the following items should be performed:

1. Check that the line cable has been properly routed and that each single
conductor has been properly connected to the line terminals.

2. Check that the unit has been properly connected to ground.

3. Check that all end of the travel micro switches are properly wired and
mounted and adjust them, if necessary, as described in section 14.3 of the
manual.

4. Check the proper mechanical coupling of each potentiometer and adjust all
potentiometer sensing circuits as described in section 14.2 of the manual.

5. Check that the x-ray tube and the Image intensifier are firmly mounted on
their supports as described in section 6 of the manual.

6. Verify that the minimum elevation end switches assembly is placed in the
position complaint with the physical dimensions of the Image system as
detailed in section 6.8.

7. Verify that the radiographic and fluoroscopic exposures can be correctly


released via the exposure pushbuttons of the Unit console in all techniques.

8. Enter the Table service mode and carry out the software setting of the unit
as described in the following paragraphs.

9. Align the x-ray beam as described in section 9 of the manual.

10. Check the collimator calibration and correct the factory default (if necessary)
as described in section 16 of the manual.

11. Check that the SFD film divisions and correct the factory default (if
necessary) as described in section 15 the manual.

12. Check that the tomo layer settings and correct the factory default (if
necessary) as described in section 8.12 and 8.13of the manual.

261 / 671
1 / 20
8.2. CONFIGURATION MODE

The remote tilting table is equipped with self-diagnostic software that monitors the status of
the electronics circuits. The behavior of the diagnostic module depends on the operative
status of the unit, and in particular:

UNIT START UP PHASE

At the unit start-up, an automatic self test routine is executed in order to check the main
electronic circuits and the connected devices. In particular the touch screen console executes
the generator initialization and establishes the serial link communication.

If the touch screen console does not detect any error condition, on the color TFT display the
following figure will appear

As soon as the user touches the GO button the system is ready to start the normal operation;
the table control desk CPU start executing the keyboard test to verify that the joysticks and
the buttons that control the major unit movements are not faulty.

263 / 671
2 / 20

264 / 671
In case of detected errors the table CPU starts the slaves CPU diagnostics; in the negative
on the table messages display the following error message will appear:

Do check the error number and make reference to section 17 “ERROR CODES LIST”
The unit is immediately set of out of service and the user can only try to clear the error by
switching the unit OFF, wait for about 10 seconds and switch it ON. In case the error is not
cleared the operator must contact the Service team.

If the keyboard test is ended without error detection, the control desk CPU executes an
initialization of all the slaves CPU of the system. This Status is indicated to the operator by
the following message:

3 / 265
20 / 671
In this phase, two main error types can be detected:

A slave CPU has not completed the start up procedure;

In this case one of the following messages will appear on the LCD display:

The user can try to clear the error by switching the unit OFF, wait for about 20 seconds and
switch it ON. In case the error is not cleared he must contact the Service team.

A wrong software version is installed on the slave CPU;

In this case one of the following messages will appear on the LCD display:

Where "slave" indicates the slave CPU that declares s firmware version different from the
expected one.

266 / 671
4 / 20

267 / 671
The unit is immediately set of out of service and the user can only try to clear the error by
switching the unit OFF, wait for about 10 seconds and switch it ON. In case the error is not
cleared he must contact the Service team.

It is possible that at this stage the column centering and the tilting centering functions do not
operate correctly; in this case follows the instructions contained section 8 for proper unit
software calibration.-

In case a fault condition is detected, a special error message appears on the remote Console
display and the circuit that has generated the error is set out of order.

In this case please refer to section 17 of the manual for the description of the error code. Do
not proceed with the unit test until unit proper operation has been restored.

Check that the unit is configured as version as here and in after detailed in section 11 (SW
jumper setting)

268 / 671
5 / 20
8.3. UNIT FIRST SWITCH ON

8.3.1. ENTERING THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MODE


The remote tilting table is equipped with a software package that allows the service personnel
to set various configurations and calibration parameters, that are stored into the 3-phase
CPU serial eeprom. To run the service software is necessary to enter the unit maintenance
mode carrying out the following procedure:

1. Open the control desk to access the touch screen assembly.


Insert the Mecall USB service license key in the USB connector of the touch screen CPU
board as described in the following figure

2. Switch the system on and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch screen that
it will be displayed as shown in the following figure.

270 / 671
6 / 20

271 / 671
3. Touch service tools icon and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch screen

display as shown in the following figure.

When the unit enters the maintenance mode, the most of the safety controls are
disabled.
In particular:
1. The Anti collision routine is disabled;
2. All safety controls related with potentiometers and encoders sensing circuits are
disabled;
3. All movements can be operated by the service personnel only at the control desk
side. Only the end of the travel micro switches can stop the movements;
4. The feedback signals from all power drivers are ignored;
5. The movements speed can be modified only by the sensing potentiometer value (
low speed close to travel limits )
FOR SUCH REASONS SERVICE PERSONNELL IS REQUESTED TO OPERATE
THE UNIT BEING VERY CAREFULL NOT TO PRODUCE DAMAGES TO THE
UNIT AND/OR INJURY ANY OTHER PERSON PRESENTS IN THE ROOM.

7 / 20

272 / 671
8.4. MINIMUM ELEVATION END SWITCHES SETTING

The remote tilting table can be equipped with different manufacturers Image systems.
Because the I.I. assemblies can be of different length, the minimum tabletop/floor distance
depends on the actual model of Image system. In order to grant a safe operation of the unit
the CAMS of minimum elevation end switches and emergency switches must be mechanically
moved to one of the four preset position in the way to avoid a collision with the floor when
operation the elevation movement of the tabletop as shown in the following figure:

The installer must choose the correct position using as reference the following table that
describes the supported Image systems length.
I.I. SUPPORTED MINIMUM TABLETOP END SWITCHES
SIZE IMAGE SYSTEM TO FLOOR DISTANCE POSITION

9" TH9428 - CD100 600 mm Position #1 - 600 mm


9" TH9428 - CD1000 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - EDS CD 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - HIRIS-A PLUS 664 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
9" TH9438 - HIRIS-T PLUS 669 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
12" TH9432 - CD100 700 mm Position #2 - 700 mm
12" TH9432 - CD1000 796 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - EDS CD 796 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - HIRIS-A PLUS 773 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
12" TH9432 - HIRIS-T PLUS 779 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
14" TH9435 - HIRIS-A PLUS 808 mm Position #3 - 800 mm
16" TH9447 - EDS CD 843 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
16" TH9447 - HIRIS-A PLUS 843 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
16" TH9447 - HIRIS-T PLUS 851 mm Position #4 - 850 mm
PIXIUM 5100 500 mm Position #0 - 500 mm
DETECTOR

273 / 671
8 / 20

274 / 671
Once moved the CAMS to the correct position, the installer must inform the Unit CPU setting
the selection bit switch as detailed in the following figure:

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER:


The collision software has been designed in the way that the minimum distance between the
bottom side of the image system and the floor is equal or greater than 50 mm as shown in the
following figure:

In case the image system installed on the unit is not present in the supported image systems
list, the installer is responsible to set the elevation end switches in the way to grant the 50
mm minimum distance.

275 / 671
9 / 20

276 / 671
8.5. 0° TILT STOP SETTING
0° TILT STOP SETTING

Using the following procedure is possible to record the position of the horizontal stop for tilting
movement.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch TILT icon and wait for the tilt menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. Using the tilting joystick 37 drive the unit to its horizontal position.

4. Touch icon 0° to store the actual potentiometer value.

In case the value is not considered valid by the Unit CPU a specific error message will
appear on the touch screen display.

5. Exit the TILT service menu touching icon

277 / 671
10 / 20

278 / 671
8.6. 0° COLUMN INCIDENCE STOP SETTING
Using the following procedure is possible to record the position of the vertical stop for the
tube incidence movement.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch INCIDENCE icon and wait for the incidence menu to appear on the touch
screen display as shown in the following figure.

3. Using the tilting joystick 40 drive the tube stand to its vertical position.

4. Touch icon 0° to store the actual potentiometer value.

In case the value is not considered valid by the Unit CPU a specific error message will
appear on the touch screen display.

5. Exit the TILT service menu touching icon

279 / 671
11 / 20

280 / 671
8.7. SELECTION OF DISPLAY LANGUAGE

Using the following procedure is possible to select the language that will be used by the
system on the console display.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

In the configuration box of the main service menu, select one of the supported languages.

2. save the new setting touching icon

touching icon

281 / 671
3. Exit the service menu

12 / 20

282 / 671
8.8. SETTING THE TUBE JOYSTICK ORIENTATION

It is possible to simulate a CW rotation of the tube and TBT movement joystick to match the
user habits or particular application using the following procedure:

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch JOYSTICK icon and wait for the incidence menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Select the desired tube joystick orientation keeping in mind that:

a. X = identifies the tube/Detector longitudinal movement;

b. Y = identifies the tabletop lateral movement

4. save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

13 /283
20 / 671
8.9. TUBE JOYSTICK DYNAMIC RESPONSE SETTING

It is possible to set different dynamics response of the tube joystick to match the user habits
or particular application using the following procedure:

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch JOYSTICK icon and wait for the incidence menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. In the JOYSTICK 1 box select the preferred behaviour (dynamics response) and the
width of the dead zone area.

4. save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

284 / 671
14 / 20

285 / 671
8.10. TILT AND TUBE JOYSTICKS HOME POSITION SETTING

Using the following procedure is possible to record the home position for the tilt and the
TUBE/SFD longitudinal joysticks.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch JOYSTICK icon and wait for the incidence menu to appear on
the touch screen display as shown in the following figure.

3. Be careful to leave the tilt and the TUBE/SFD longitudinal joysticks in their
home
position.

4. Touch icon 0° to store the home position of the joysticks potentiometers.


In case the value is not considered valid by the Unit CPU a specific error message
will appear on the touch screen display.

5. Exit the joystick service menu touching icon

286 / 671
15 / 20
8.11. SETTING THE ROOM CEILING HEIGHT

Important information
The software module has been designed to allow the use of the unit in a room
with a minimum ceiling height of 260 cm. It is not possible there for to operate
the system in case the ceiling is lower than such value.

The Unit remote tilting table is equipped with an anti collision software module that is capable
to prevent the collision of any unit part with the room ceiling.
By means of this procedure is possible to record into the 3-phase CPU serial eeprom the
actual height of the room ceiling.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. To set this parameter, do press the Celing height row touch icon
to enable the use of a numeric keypad.

4. Set the actual ceiling height and touch icon ENTER on the numeric pad to insert the
value.

5. Save the new setting touching icon

6. Exit the service menu touching icon

288 / 671
16 / 20

289 / 671
8.12. SELECTION OF I.I TYPE AND LENGTH

Using the following procedure is possible to set the Image Intensifier type installed into the
SFD.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1


2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure

3. To set the image I.I. type and length, please do switch properly the SW 14 CPU board
as shown in chapter 6. Find below as an example a switched board in function of the
image I.I. type and length. If for instance the value that we want to set is 700mm, all the
other switches must be to off.

290 / 671
17 / 20
8.13. SETTING THE LEFT WALL DISTANCE

The Unit remote tilting table is equipped with an anti collision software module that is capable
to prevent the collision of any unit part with the room wall at the left side of the unit.
By means of this procedure is possible to record into the 3-phase CPU serial eeprom the
actual distance of the left wall from the tilting tower vertical axis (tilting pivot).

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. On the Left wall row touch icon to enable the use of a numeric
keypad.

4. Set the actual left wall and touch icon ENTER on the numeric pad to insert the value.

5. Save the new setting touching icon

6. Exit the service menu touching icon

291 / 671
18 / 20

292 / 671
8.14. SETTING THE RIGHT WALL DISTANCE

The Unit remote tilting table system is equipped with an anti collision software module that is
capable to prevent the collision of any unit part with the room wall at the right side of the unit.
By means of this procedure is possible to record into the 3-phase CPU serial eeprom the
actual distance of the right wall from the tilting tower vertical axis (tilting pivot).

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. On the Right wall row touch icon to enable the use of a numeric
keypad.

4. Set the actual right wall and touch icon ENTER on the numeric pad to insert the value.

293 / 671
5. Save the new setting touching icon

6. Exit the service menu touching icon

19 / 20

294 / 671
8.15. TOMO OFF SET mm

Using the following procedure is possible to set the topographic layer

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. On the Tomo off set mm row touch icon to enable the use of a numeric keypad.

4. Set the numeric pad to insert the value.

5. Save the new setting touching icon

6. Exit the service menu touching icon

8.16. TOMO OFF SET (DIGITAL)


mm
In case of a digital Tomo, do follow this previous procedure just make the setting to the off
set digital mm row.

8.17. FFD STITCHING (cm)


FFD stitching cm is an option to be set in case the standard stitching focal distance (150cm)
need to be changed.

295 / 671
20 / 20

296 / 671
9. BEAM ALIGNMENT

THE OPERATIONS DESCRIBED HEREAFTER REQUIRE THE USE OF X--


RADIATION. CONSEQUENTLY THE OPERATORS ARE REQUESTED TO
TAKE ALL THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY
TYPE OF EXPOSURE WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT.

THE PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN SECTIONS 9.2, 9.2.1 AND 9.2.4 MUST


BE CONSIDERED AS SUGGESTED.
DIFFERENT ALLIGNMENT PROCEDURES CAN BE VALID AND APPLICABLE
AS WELL

In this section will be described all the calibration procedures that must be carried out during
the installation of the Remote-tilting table.
These operations include the alignment of the x-ray beam with the SFD and with the I.I
system.
Some operations have been already executed in factory during the final test of the unit and
should not be repeated.
Anyway it is a good norm to repeat these calibrations at the installation site to check the full
operation of the unit.

297 / 671
1 / 15
9.1. INTRODUCTION

The procedure to check the coincidence between the x-ray field and the simulation lamp
field is composed of a sequence of adjustment that must be carried out as described in the
following paragraphs.

The procedures hereinafter described must be considered as suggested. different


alignment procedures can be valid and applicable as well.

9.2. COLLIMATOR X-RAY BEAM AXIS ALIGNMENT CHECK

THE ALLIGNMENT CAN BE CONSIDERED GOOD IF THE DISTANCE


BETWEEN THE CENTERS OF THE IRRADIATED AREA IS SMALLER THAN
3 MM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE A.

1. Bring the focal distance to its minimum (115 cm), set the collimator for manual
operation and project an illuminated field of 20x20 cm.

2. Put a cassette loaded with a 35x35 cm. X-Ray film under the collimator; center the
cassette vs the illuminated area.

3. Put a radiopaque marker on the cassette.

4. Set convenient exposure data in order to obtain an optical density on the film of 0.8
(suggested 50 KVp Η 0.5 mAs ), and take an exposure.

5. Without moving the cassette, set the FFD at 150 cm (or 180 cm) and take a second
exposure. Develop the film.

6. Verify the center misalignment as indicated in fig. A.


7. If the alignment is good, proceed with section 9.2.4 otherwise carry out the instructions
contained into section 9.2.3.

299 / 671
2 / 15

300 / 671
115

150
(180)

3 / 301
15 / 671
9.2.1. ALIGNMENT OF THE COLLIMATOR X-RAY BEAM AXIS.

1. Using as reference the following figure, loose screws 5 and move the collimator
depending on the result of the test described into section 9.2

2. In particular, closing the blades the center will move in one direction : MOVE THE
COLLIMATOR IN THE SAME DIRECTION (SEE FIG. A ).

3. Lock the screws 29.C and carry out the test described into section 9.2.1

302 / 671
4 / 15

303 / 671
9.2.2. ALIGNMENT AND CHECK OF THE LIGHT FILED VS X-RAY FIELD

This adjustment may require a new adjustment along the transverse


direction as previously described.

1. Bring the focal distance to its minimum (105 cm), set the collimator for manual
operation and project an illuminated field of 30x30 cm.
2. Put a cassette loaded with a 35x35 cm. x-ray film under the collimator; center the
cassette Vs the illuminated area.
3. Put a radiopaque marker on the cassette in order to identify the film and the geometry;
put a radiopaque marker just at the border of the light field in order to identify the light
field on the film as shown in the following figure.

4. Set convenient exposure data in order to obtain an optical density on the film of 0.8
(suggested 50 KVp 0.5 mAs ), and take an exposure.

5. Develop the film and verify the misalignment of the light field Vs the x-ray field. Carry
out this test at different FFD and with another aperture.

304 / 671
5 / 15
6. If the distance between the two borders is greater than 5 mm or the x-ray field is greater
than the light field proceed with the following steps. In the negative the
accuracy between the light filed and the x-ray filed can be considered acceptable.

The misalignment measured in step 6 can be inserted in one of the following possibilities:

a: The light field is not centered in transversal direction;

b: The light field is not centered in longitudinal direction;

c: The light field is too small or too large;

Using as reference the following lamp assembly figure, proceed as follow:

A: ALLIGNMENT IN TRANSVERSAL DIRECTION

1. Access the collimator lamp removing the rear cover as shown in the following figure.

2. Loose screws 9 and move the metal bracket 6 up or down in the Z direction.

3. Tight the screws and carry out the test starting from step 1.

4. Mount back the lamp cover.

B: ALLIGNMENT IN LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION

1. Access the collimator lamp.

2. Loose screws 8 and move the metal bracket 6 in the Y direction.

3. Tight the screws and carry out the test starting from step 1.

4. Mount back the lamp cover.

C: MATCHING X-RAY FIELD SIZE WITH LIGHT FIELD SIZE

1. Access the collimator lamp.

2. Loose screws 8 and move the metal bracket 6 in the X direction.

3. Tight the screws and carry out the test starting from step 1.

306 / 671
6 / 15

307 / 671
308 / 671
7 / 15
9.2.3. ALIGNMENT AND CHECK OF THE COLLIMATOR CROSS.

1. Loose (not completely) screws 6.

2. Adjust the mask as required.

3. Tight screws 6.

310 / 671
8 / 15

311 / 671
9.2.4. ALIGNMENT OF THE BEAM WITH THE SFD CENTRE

For the centering of the x-ray tube two different possibilities of adjustment are provided, one
transverse and one longitudinal.

It should be noted that longitudinal adjustment means the one that is made in the direction
head/feet of the tabletop.

TRANSVERSE ADJUSTMENT

THE REMOTE TILTING TABLE IS FACTORY PRESET WITH THE SPACERS


NECESSSARY TO ALIGN THE BEAM WITH THE CENTER OF THE SPOT
FILM DEVICE.
THEREFORE THIS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE IS NOT NORMALLY
REQUIRED.
IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO MODIFY THE FACTORY ALIGNMENT THE
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MUST BE CARRIED OUT.

1. Remove the cooling fan mounted on the trunnion ring with screws 3.

2. Determine how many shims 8 must be removed from the block that supports the x-ray
tube in order to bring the center of the beam on the longitudinal axis of the spot film
device (each shim corresponds to a displacement of 2 mm.).

3. Loosen the fixing nuts 4 and 9 and remove or add as many shims as necessary.

4. Tighten the fixing nuts 4 and 9.

5. Mount the tube cooling fan.

LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT.

1. Loosen the 4 grub screws 9 located on the sides of the fixing block of the trunnion ring.

2. Loosen the fixing nuts 4 and 6.

3. Move the x-ray tube along the horizontal direction until the center of the beam gets on
the center of the spot film device.

4. Tighten the 4 lateral contrast grub screws 9.

5. Tighten the fixing nuts 4 and 6.

312 / 671
9 / 15
9.2.5. TUBE ANGULATION ADJUSTMENT.

1. Loosen the fixing nut 1.

2. Adjust the off-center nut 2 until the x-ray tube rotates, around the tube arm axis, up to
the desired angle.

3. Lock off center nut 2 and tighten the fixing nut 1.

9.2.6. TUBE ROTATION ADJUSTMENT.

1. Loosen the 4 fixing screws 7.

2. Rotate the x-ray tube in the trunnion ring until it reaches the desired angle.

3. Firmly keep in position the x-ray tube and tighten screws 7.

314 / 671
10 / 15

315 / 671
316 / 671
11 / 15
9.2.7. ALIGNMENT OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER WITH THE SFD CENTRE

The spot film device of remote tilting table provides two different possibilities of adjustment for
bringing the center of the image intensifier in correspondence of the center of the spot film
device: along the longitudinal axis and along its cross axis.

It should be noted that longitudinal axis means the axis parallels to the head/feet direction of
the table top.

9.2.8. CROSS ADJUSTMENT.

1. Loosen the 6 fixing nuts A of the I.I. supporting bracket as shown in the following
figure.

2. Remove or add the number of shims B necessary to align the center of the image
intensifier with the beam as shown in the following figure.

3. Tighten the 6 fixing nuts A.

318 / 671
12 / 15

319 / 671
9.2.9. LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT.

CAUTION:
BEFORE CARRYING OUT THIS ADJUSTMENT MAKE SURE IT IS REALLY
NECESSARY. IN FACT, THE LONGITUDINAL ADJUSTMENT IS ALWAYS
MADE IN THE FACTORY DURING TESTS AND, GENERALLY, IT SHOULD
NOT BE MADE DURING INSTALLATION.

1. Loosen the locking nuts A as shown in the following figure.

2. Tighten or loosen the adjustment nuts B as necessary to align the center of the image
intensifier with the beam as shown in the following figure.

3. Tighten the locking nuts A.

WARNING:
ONCE THIS ADJUSTMENT HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT INCLINE THE
COLUMN UP TO ITS EXTREME LIMITS AND CHECK THAT THERE IS NO
CONTACT OF THE CABLES TENSION RODS WITH THE GUIDE PULLEYS
OF THE CABLES.

320 / 671
13 / 15
9.2.10. COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION CHECK

THE OPERATIONS DESCRIBED HEREAFTER REQUIRE THE USE OF X--


RADIATION.
CONSEQUENTLY THE OPERATORS ARE REQUESTED TO TAKE ALL THE
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY TYPE OF
EXPOSURE WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT.

1. Drive that table to the horizontal position, set the FFD at 105 cm, insert a 35x43 cm
cassette into the SFD and select the film full size.

2. As soon as the cassette is recognized by the SFD the collimator automatically opens to
the cassette size. Check that the size of the irradiated area is correct. In the negative,
correct the collimator calibration as described in section 16.6 of this manual.
3. Expose the film and develop it.
4. Check that the size of the irradiated area is correct. In the negative, correct the
collimator calibration as described in section 16.6 of this manual.
5. Eject the cassette, tilt the table to the +90° position, set the FFD at 150 cm. insert a
35x43 cm cassette into the SFD and select the film full size.
6. As soon as the cassette is recognized by the SFD the collimator automatically opens to
the cassette size. Check that the size of the irradiated area is correct. In the negative,
correct the collimator calibration as described in section 16.6 of this manual.
7. Expose the film and develop it.
8. Check that the size of the irradiated area is correct and there is no need to correct the
collimator calibration to correct the mechanical deflection. In the negative, correct the
collimator calibration as described in section 16.6 of this manual.

322 / 671
14 / 15

323 / 671
9.2.11. SFD CALIBRATION CHECK

THE OPERATIONS DESCRIBED HEREAFTER REQUIRE THE USE OF X--


RADIATION.
CONSEQUENTLY THE OPERATORS ARE REQUESTED TO TAKE ALL THE
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY TYPE OF EXPOSURE
WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT.
.

1. Insert a cassette.
2. Select the full size and place a target in the center of the collimator cross.
3. Expose the film and develop it.
4. Check that the target appears in the center of the film. In the negative, align the
cassette center with the SFD center as described in section 15.5 of this manual.
5. Insert a 35x43 cm cassette a select a film division by 5.
6. Expose the film and develop it.
7. Check the distance between the divisions is correct and corresponding to the
customer's desire. In the negative, correct it as described in section 15.6 of this manual.

324 / 671
15 / 15
10. CONTROL CIRCUITS & HW JUMPER SETTING
10.1. INTRODUCTION

The control electronics of the remote tilting table has been designed in order to control the
different movements of the unit as well as to give to the operator the possibility to manually
control the unit.

The unit calibration is carried out by means of the SW utilities the small touch panel (with
LCD display) on the tube side control keyboard and accessing to the Mecall Integrated PC
touch panel.

The unit is always operating using the detector with the only exception of the “free
technique” were the operator can use a standard radiographic cassette.

326 / 671
1 / 12
10.2. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Unit control system is composed of four separate CPU boards connected by means of
a serial link. The Remote Control Desk CPU acts as system manager and main user
interface.

The serial link protocol adopted is a standard ISO CAN.


A hardware controller in accordance with ISO standard ensures proper error free data
transmission.
In particular, for error detection, every transmitter is monitored by its own receiver.

All nodes carry out a cyclic redundancy check (15 bit CRC).
They observe the bit stuffing rule and the message format.
A message failure is also generated when no acknowledge is returned by a node.

Together these functions guarantee a humming distance of 6 and a probability of a residual


errors of < 10 (-13) per transmission.

CLISIS Control Desk CPU BOARD:

It is the main user interface (keyboard and display) control.


This board is responsible for the can bus (communication link) control.

CLISIS MAIN CPU BOARD:

It directly controls all the main motions of the unit with the exclusion of the inherent SFD
and collimator functions that are controlled from dedicated CPU cards.
This card act also as Interface control with the external world (X-Ray generator, TV chain,
etc). The related I/O signals are optically and/or galvanically insulated (opto-couplers
and/or relay).
On this Card are also located the unit On/Off control circuit, these last commanded from
the corresponding pushbuttons are present on the Main Control Desk keyboard.

CLISIS SFD CPU BOARD:

It directly controls all the function of the SFD. It is responsible for the correct X-Ray
cassette positioning as well as for the near film shutter positioning and the X-Ray Grid
control.
This card is also managing the SFD control desk (Operator table side interface). The
commands generated from this last keyboard are sent to the Control Desk CPU for a
correct management (all the actions are commanded from the Control Desk CPU).

CLISIS Collimator CPU BOARD:

It directly controls all the Collimator shutters positioning.

328 / 671
2 / 12

329 / 671
10.3. HW JUMPERS SETTINGS

There are some jumpers/dip switches that allow the service engineer to
disable safety interlocks of the unit.
Such switches have the main porpoise to easy the trouble shooting
operation of field engineers, but can also dramatically reduce the safety level
of the unit if enabled during normal operation.
IS THEREFORE RESPONSABILITY OF THE FIELD ENGINEER THAT
SUCH SWITCHES ARE NOT LEFT ENABLED IF NOT FOR THE TIME
STRICTLY NECESSARY FOR THE TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATIONS.

In the current section the use of the jumpers and/or dip switches mounted on the different
electronic boards composing the System control system will be carefully described.
It must be underlined that the function of such switches might be related with the firmware
version installed on the unit.
For this reason is a good practice to check all service notes released after the distribution of
this manual to be sure that the jumpers still conserve the original function.

330 / 671
3 / 12
10.4. CONSOLE CPU JUMPERS SETTINGS

332 / 671
4 / 12

333 / 671
10.5. MAIN CPU BOARD JUMPERS SETTINGS

334 / 671
5 / 12
9999
2
OI CR *M OR Rov.k •••e
OZW.11111 m
! "AI • El t ne r - e 11 •—
O t s
901 0 .
•*
A •
ay__
11. •• ‘" • "
.•
-•
• •
IR' ' n a i aa — _ , ,

uam... Lew
28
i ___________ Eò
.
c
...„ oo D
!
eggig CMLF 11• ,

nrua. i

e l2et• n77.11::e1- 1

•e
':
_ ea 1111 eilT
::1

re-
e • . ' r i l
I ai e ai
i i la, " : 5,
lllllien 11111
i 11 1,1

e , 9 2 1 .
t g
'<un 1111-zla
it
radp
its›.
114,71TTE111
g obam
n eas e
II
01101

335 / 671
JP3
GENERATOR OFF .P4
M _________ PRIORITY DWABLE FaNPRATOR OFF
_________ COMMNNO W A FIA-13£

JP3 JP4
GENERATOR OFF GENERATOR OFF
____ PRIORITY ENASLE _________ CONIAMICI IO ASTA-RAI

C15133

CAN L•IF TERIPINATOR


Wel I
CAN LLNK OIL POLPO NUR
0111A8LECI

GNI"
COI LIRE TERWIIATOR 1.11
ENASLEO CAN LINK ENA8LEO

6 / 12

JPI .P2
TR-T PW FP-ROSPO(
0/1141 CARLINE M DE3
DIABLED
ACINO LOW

TR-T PW PERORACI( JP1 F2


AMIE NON 0/1141 CAN LINE 1.1.

336 / 671
CCM
CPURESET Ma CPU PERMANENT RESET

i neahl
.59.1 511 mie YRW MI 2: Ail;, P9 ustikt
la • W* "Tceir-
rota Ona "
•• •- •I

W a O , •••- - "
.-. A • •
0
22

3 18
6

..........§... m .........§........
o
isa c ) c c a e
51 n b C C C LE' _________________________
1 . e

521 a 1 ±1 0
&me
il la112. i 7: .: 1:111, 7 t rti
il•,•••• - I.

goiiiiii i rq-, ..
r -1 ; 71 15
• IE
lE 22222.01 —11; 111 1 4;

11"1- g
...... , 11111111,1111 li 111112 I lir;

i— O D la al 0 1.3 li ij! i gli '"I I.

,
I
,
7
11. 1. wi wi

i I wia ! I il I il IlIn .7 •,"
, : in i 02 . i -
SW15
4161•111PAILISELECTION L• JPJ
WN1S ara

337 / 671
7 / 12
= L:11
04
SW5
EIWIR 0, 43;4 ai o*ou
11
3Li
Ma ~casa

gra

I MM RAM EIELECTION

338 / 671
10.6. MAIN INTERFACE BOARD JUMPERS SETTINGS
S I N

I 1.I. ZOOM RCLAY


045AOLC
I
TV.RCV C OMMON
CL*SCIROUSCO
Ealti
iffinn ICLECTION
CCIMPATOR LV dc

ZOOM RCLAY TV.RCV C OMMON


eNAeLe rROMUICOINAL
ItCHOWC SCLC C110.4
CUSIS 24V Cc

DIRCCT OUTPUT

U]TOPOONAL C
RLO CONTACI

42TOP SJOKA L
O RU CONTACI
I

EZIM 10 CL1512 CROUND


SPAR
11LOCOMMON
_________ SOMVAACCONIROL

CMCOINAL CIP. TONO


COOMO N CONTACI! S S D
7.4.AYOM etOMAL
CUOI% 3~0e RLADY MOUS
Zia COMO 24V dlk
CXTCOINAL CAP. ISINTIS
1110C1~1001T CONTACT5

arn

X-ItAY NV 2
CCIICILATOIR 24V de «MIRAMI! 2.11V4c
i 1

811/42
i
X-RAY Oli ~NAL OCII. RLADY 110AL *
WALLARY I4V dc a AUXIUARY Met i

339 / 671
8 / 12

340 / 671
10.7. SFD CPU JUMPERS SETTINGS

341 / 671
9 / 12
10.8. COLLIMATOR CPU JUMPERS SETTINGS

ii. i 015.1W , MI
• e,_____ - I il [I-' 7
I IM

- o's EEwmtz°,,?.?Fu.
, ______
„ r-7.,., gò]1.21R
090 05.9 IO*

p. ...1q EE- anS.F1 E, gt e_


.:,"='",, .„ • CM
qi lEn0211
3
„„Zdji i
Et n =.•
=.51
N l'I .1=..=
.,,.., 1.1
1-1.= — e Tel
R g i
atm3 W.,
, ____________ 1)2 Q.
S W 3 t
_ , SW4 E
nrNrCh

ON SERIAL PORT O AS RS-232 (FLASH


EPROM PROGRAMMING)
SW3
ON SERIAL PORT O AS RS-485
(RESERVED USE)
SW3
ON

h AUX SERIAL PORT 1 AS RS-232


SW3
UN
AUX PORT 1 AS RS-485
(RESERVED USE)
SW3

343 / 671
10 / 12
rraad I R AM CPU

EE
t i

P8 P8 sr, n P E re,
w.s
ACNI
w
cAu e lin D1P2
•A:

gg
Br t

u.iiiíitiii U1. 11 21'


I.
wMr
1,

E -
r
Ci=
I 714
I i
o -. s ite
SW3 SW4 Ee
t•
tinetiagigighilaw

eatt COLLINAIOR SCRVICC NO«


SV4

CAN AtAl.nCR NOMINA


CSVOCN ~SI RCMAIN Cr>
SVA

racc

SW4

:MIear . t
ce
SV.
rane

SV4

• ir
e
.V4
rane
S
V4

SCP2AL CCPPOs CPASC AT FavCP CiN

1W4

344 / 671
11 / 12
10.9. TUBESTAND CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS SETTINGS

346 / 671
12 / 12

347 / 671
11. SW JUMPERS SETTING
The Unit control firmware includes a set of software switches whose function is to enable or
disable optional components of the table or skip some parts of the safety chain.
Such switches are accessible in service mode via a specific configuration menu as detailed
in the following paragraphs of this section.

It must be underlined that the function of such switches might be related with the firmware
version installed on the unit. For this reason is a good practice to check all service notes
released after the distribution of this manual to be sure that the jumpers still conserve the
original function.

There are some software switches that allow the service engineer to disable
safety interlocks of the unit. Such switches have the main porpoise to easy
the trouble shooting operation of field engineers, but can also dramatically
reduce the safety level of the unit if enabled during normal operation.
IS THEREFORE RESPONSABILITY OF THE FIELD ENGINEER THAT
SUCH SWITCHES ARE NOT LEFT ENABLED IF NOT FOR THE TIME
STRICTLY NECESSARY FOR THE TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATIONS.

348 / 671
1 / 12
11.1. SET UP SELECTION

Using the following chapter procedure it is possible to enable/disable each on of the chart
functions listed below:

Interface Icon INSTALLER SET UP FUNCTIONS


CONNECTION
Cassette on/off Move in the check box value to mm or
inch in function of measure used
Low speed cassette Move in the check box value to OFF for
on/off standard speed or ON to low speed
Grid Park exclusion Move in the check box value to grid
on/off parking ON to disable the parking
Collimator iris Set onto ON to disable the Iris shutters of
Disable the automatic collimator
SFD safety light cell Set onto ON to disable the iris shutters
disable on/off
Incident Detent mode Set onto ON to stop automatically the
tube column at the 0° position
Incident det. Power- Set onto ON to activate the tube column
on automatic stop at 0° position at the unit
start up.
The function can be set only if the
installer has previously set the
INCIDENT DETENT MODE
Set onto ON to stop automatically the
table tilting movement at the 0° position
Tilt det mode Set onto ON to stop automatically the
(TILT 0 STATUS AT table tilting movement at the 0° position
POWER ON) The function can be set only if the
installer has previously set the TILT
DETENT MODE
Collimator mode If set onto ON = the Collimator remains in
manual mode when Image processor set
a new area.
If set onto OFF = the Collimator enters in
auto mode when Image processor set a
new area
Grid Acc.1 It is set onto ON as a Standard
Grid Acc. 2 It is set onto OFF as a Standard
Invert V power ON Set onto ON to automatically enable the
V-rev output at power on.
Invert H power ON Set onto ON to automatically enable the
H-rev output at power on.
Tomography It is set onto ON when THE
TOMOGRAPHY function is present
(option)
Trixel present In function of the configuration: set onto
ON if the Trixel is present
CPI generator Set onto ON in case using CPI generator.
Please do make reference to chapter
Generator type selection (section 11.2)
Access Set onto ON to enable the ACCESS
(single-end suspended tabletop) mode.

350 / 671
2 / 12

351 / 671
Interface Icon INSTALLER SET UP FUNCTIONS
CONNECTION
Fluoro service mode Set onto ON to enable fluoroscopy even
when the unit is in service mode.
Intercom disable To disable the intercom option move the
selection to ON
Stitching direction Set onto ON to reverse the stitching
reverse mode direction
Max FFD cm Move in the check box value to 150 or
180 in function of the FFD installed
Lateral Panel Virtual scan (Set onto ON if this option is
potentiometer installed)

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen display as
shown in the following figure.

3. Move the selection switch to the option to be performed “make reference to the
previous chart “installer set up selection”

352 / 671
4. Save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

3 / 12

353 / 671
11.2. GENERATOR TYPE SELECTION

In case of Deimos generator, must set up onto ON the CPI generator switch box, and
change the following generator “console set up mask” into CPI.

In case using other generators types, as for instance Castor, after entering the unit
maintenance mode (section 8.3.1) make reference to the following procedure:

1. Touch OPTION icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

2. Move the selection switch of the CPI GENERATOR option onto OFF
position.

3. Select the proper generator type on the console setup mode

354 / 671
4 / 12

355 / 671
356 / 671
4. Save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

5 / 12

357 / 671
11.3. JOYSTICK AXIS LOCK SETTING

Using the following procedure is possible to enable/disable the contemporary movements of


the control desk joysticks.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1.

2. Touch JOYSTICK icon and wait for the incidence menu to appear on the
touch screen display as shown in the following figure.

3. Move the selection switch of the MOVEMENT EXCLUSION option to the ON


position to disable the contemporary movements controlled by the joysticks.

4. Save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

358 / 671
6 / 12

359 / 671
11.4. COLLIMATOR AUTOMATIC MODALITY SELECTION

Using the following procedure is possible to select the working modality of the automatic
collimator.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1.

2. Touch OPTIONS icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Move the selection switch of the COLLIMATOR MODE option


to: ON = Collimator remains in manual mode when Image processor set new
area OFF = Collimator enters auto mode when Image processor set new area

360 / 671
4. Save the new setting touching icon

5. Exit the service menu touching icon

7 / 12

361 / 671
11.5. PATIENT LOADING POSITION TABLETOP HEIGHT

By means of this procedure is possible to record into the 3-phase CPU serial eeprom the
height that the patient tabletop must reach during the patient loading sequence.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2. Touch ELEVATION icon and wait for the menu to appear on the touch
screen display as shown in the following figure.

3. On the Tabletop height row touch icon to


enable the use of a numeric keypad.

4. Set the default height that the tabletop must reach during the patient loading
procedure and touch icon ENTER on the numeric pad to insert the value.

5. Save the new setting touching icon

6. Exit the service menu touching icon

362 / 671
8 / 12

363 / 671
11.6. TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CONFIGURATION

Using the following procedure is possible to enable / disable specific options and/or
working modality of the touch screen console.

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. On the touch screen display will appear the main service menu divided in
several configuration windows having the following meaning:

364 / 671
9 / 12
CONFIGURATION BOX

In this box is possible to set the main system configuration parameters. In particular:

Language: The installer can choose the user interface language among the supported
languages;

Generator: The installer can enable the specific generator model. HIRIS:

The installer has to check that the Hiris box is switched to absent

Infimed: The installer can enable the specific Infimed image processor model.

Table CAN speed: The installer can enable specific Can communication speed. For table
system this parameter must be set to 333 kb/s.

Table type: The installer can enable the specific table model. For instance for CLISIS
EXEL system this parameter must be set to EXEL.
CONSTANTS BOX

In this box is possible to set the main system operative parameters. In particular:

Link timeout: The installer can define the link timeout for the generator console.

Max fluoro duration: The installer can set the expiration time of the fluoroscopy timer.

Show rad data after fluoro: The installer can define if the system must automatically display
the exposure factors after fluoro or continue to show the last fluoroscopy factors.

Acustic warning on RAD: This setting has no impact.

View rad post-data: The installer can set the duration of the real exposure mAs
display

Burst fluoro: Not supported by Deimos generators

366 / 671
10 / 12

367 / 671
INFIMED BOX

This setting has impact in the CLISIS EXEL system.


ODEL BOX

This setting has no impact for DEIMOS generator.

DAP PRINTER BOX

Consolle serial channel: The installer can define the serial port of the touch screen CPU
used for the label printer. OFF selection disables the printer

Printer type: The installer can define the model of the label printer.

CPI BOX

Consolle serial channel: The installer can define the serial port of the touch screen CPU
used for communication with the CPI power cabinet.
DAP tube 1: The installer can enable/disable the DAP chamber for tube 1.
ABSENT selection disables the DAP chamber.

DAP tube 2: The installer can enable/disable the DAP chamber for tube 2.
ABSENT selection disables the DAP chamber.

11 /368
12 / 671
Enable transfer Wsn: This setting has no impact in the DRF system.

The installer can choose the IEC symbol to appear on each Working Station (accessory)
selection icon

HIRIS BOX:

In case the HIRIS RF43 device is not part of the system do not set the following
box

Working station: This setting enables the HIRIS image processor on the selected
working station. Normally this setting is 2.

msec backup AEC Hiris Rad: This setting has no influence for DRF system.

Collimator filter: The installer enable the use of a collimator with motorized filters in
combination with image processor.

Stitching: The installer can enable/disable the automatic stitching


modality. This setting requires also the Mecall license key to be effective.

Stitching protocol: The installer can specify the type of ATS stitching protocol for Hiris
HIRIS RF43.
In case of CONNEXITY system this parameter must be set on NEW.

369 / 671
12 / 12

370 / 671
12. TABLE FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD AND FACTORY
DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING

12.1. UNIT FIRWARE DOWNLOAD

The Unit control firmware is contained on the flash EPROM mounted on the console CPU,
on the main CPU board, on the SFD CPU and on the Collimator CPU board.

The installer can download the original firmware version (I.E. in case of replacement of one
CPU board) or upgrade the unit to the latest software version using the Mecall Flash EPROM
programmer utility delivered with each unit.

The utility has been designed to run under a standard Windows environment and can be
installed on any PC or laptop computer.

The connection between the laptop computer and the Unit CPU boards require a standard
null modem cable unless the collimator CPU that requires the Argostat service cable p/n
002500.218 as detailed in the following drawing:

371 / 671
1 / 24
2 / 24 373 / 671
12.2. MECALL FLASH EPROM PROGRAMMER INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE INSTALLER


THE SETUP PROGRAM WILL AUTOMATICALLY INSTALL ALSO THE HARWARE
KEY DRIVERS. FOR THIS REASON IT IS MANDATORY THAT THE HARDWARE
KEY DELIVERED WITH THE CR-ROM IS INSERTED IN THE LPT PORT OR IN THE
USB CONNECTOR.

The Mecall flash eprom programmer is a tool of the Mecall service utilities distributed to all
official customers on CD-R media.
The service tools is protected by means of an HW key that must be installed on the LTP
connector or on an USB free plug of the computer. The installer must specify the type of
hardware key needed.

The Mecall software tools is a set of service programs distributed only when the installer
accept and undersign the term of license. For further information, please contact the Mecall
service support.

The MECALL software tools can be installed on any personal computer running under
Windows environment. The installation process is guided by an installer software that can be
activated clicking on the SETUP program contained in the software CD-ROM.

The installation software will drive the user to correctly complete the installation of the
Service Utilities.

374 / 671
3 / 24
12.3. UNIT MAIN CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

The programming of the Main board CPU flash eprom (software download) can be executed
using the following procedure:

1. Connect the null-modem cable to plug CN131 on the console CPU as


shown in the following figure and to the serial port of the laptop computer.

2. Set the CPU in Bootstrap mode mounting jumper JP5 as shown in the
following figure. Reset the CPU board pressing button SW7 or switching the
unit OFF/ON.

376 / 671
4 / 24

377 / 671
3. Start the Mecall service utilities and wait for the main menu to appear on the
screen as shown in the following figure:

4. Select the TOOLS menu of the toolbar and chose the Flash programmer
option as shown in the following figure:

5. When the flash eprom programmer utility is enabled, select the WRITE
mode and load the TRIROM.H86 firmware that must be downloaded to the
TABLE main CPU as shown in the following figure.

378 / 671
5 / 24
6. Press the reset button on the main CPU board and the OK button on the
flash eprom programmer menu. Wait for the flash eprom programmer to
recognize the type of CPU, the flash eprom model and the type of bus used,
as shown in the following figure:

7. The Flash eprom programmer will automatically load the programming


firmware, totally erase the flash eprom and program them using the new file.
If the operation is successfully ended, the following message will appear on
the screen.

380 / 671
6 / 24

381 / 671
8. Click on the OK button and abandon the flash eprom programmer utility.

382 / 671
7 / 24
12.4. CONSOLE CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

The programming of the Console CPU flash eprom (software download) can be executed
using the following procedure:

1. Connect the null-modem cable to plug CN1003 on the console CPU as


shown in the following figure and to the serial port of the laptop computer.

2. Set the CPU in Bootstrap mode mounting jumper SW7 in position 2-3 as
shown in the following figure. Reset the CPU board pressing button SW5 or
switching the unit ON.

3. Start the Mecall service utilities and wait for the main menu to appear on the
screen as shown in the following figure:

384 / 671
8 / 24

385 / 671
4. Select the TOOLS menu of the toolbar and chose the Flash programmer
option as shown in the following figure:

5. When the flash eprom programmer utility is enabled, select the WRITE
mode and load the CONSROM.H86 firmware that must be downloaded to
the TABLE main CPU as shown in the following figure.

386 / 671
9 / 24
6. Press the reset button on the main CPU board and the OK button on the
flash eprom programmer menu. Wait for the flash eprom programmer to
recognize the type of CPU, the flash eprom model and the type of bus used,
as shown in the following figure:

388 / 671
10 / 24

389 / 671
7. The Flash eprom programmer will automatically load the programming
firmware, totally erase the flash eprom and program them using the new file.
If the operation is successfully ended, the following message will appear on
the screen.

8. Click on the OK button and abandon the flash eprom programmer utility.

390 / 671
11 / 24
12.5. SFD CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

The programming of the Spot Film Device CPU flash eprom (software download) can be
executed using the following procedure:

1. Connect the null-modem cable to plug CN413 on the console CPU as


shown in the following figure and to the serial port of the laptop computer.

2. Set the CPU in Bootstrap mode mounting jumper SW5 in position 2-3 as
shown in the following figure. Reset the CPU board pressing button SW6 or
switching the unit ON.

392 / 671
12 / 24

393 / 671
3. Start the Mecall service utilities and wait for the main menu to appear on the
screen as shown in the following figure:

4. Select the TOOLS menu of the toolbar and chose the Flash programmer
option as shown in the following figure:

5. When the flash eprom programmer utility is enabled, select the WRITE
mode and load the SERROM.H86 firmware that must be downloaded to the
table main CPU as shown in the following figure.

394 / 671
13 / 24
6. Press the reset button on the main CPU board and the OK button on the flash eprom
programmer menu. Wait for the flash eprom programmer to recognize the type of
CPU, the flash eprom model and the type of bus used, as shown in the following
figure:

7. The Flash eprom programmer will automatically load the programming firmware,
totally erase the flash eprom and program them using the new file. If the operation is
successfully ended, the following message will appear on the screen.

396 / 671
14 / 24

397 / 671
8. Click on the OK button and abandon the flash eprom programmer utility.

398 15
/ 671
/ 24
12.6. COLLIMATOR CPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

The programming of the Collimator CPU flash eprom (software download) can be executed
using the following procedure:

1. Remove the collimator front cover to access the CPU board from the bottom
side.

2. Connect the Mecall service cable p/n 002500.218 to plug CN621 on the
collimator CPU as shown in the following figure and to the serial port of the
laptop computer.

3. Set the CPU in Bootstrap mode moving jumper SW1 to the left side as
shown in the following figure. Reset the CPU board pressing button SW2 or
switching the unit ON.

4. Start the Mecall service utilities and wait for the main menu to appear on the
screen as shown in the following figure:

399 / 671
16 / 24

400 / 671
5. Select the TOOLS menu of the toolbar and chose the Flash programmer
option as shown in the following figure:

6. When the flash eprom programmer utility is enabled, select the WRITE
mode and load the COLROM.H86 firmware that must be downloaded to the
Table main CPU as shown in the following figure.

401 / 671
17 / 24
7. Press the reset button on the main CPU board and the OK button on the
flash eprom programmer menu. Wait for the flash eprom programmer to
recognize the type of CPU, the flash eprom model and the type of bus used,
as shown in the following figure:

8. The Flash eprom programmer will automatically load the programming


firmware, totally erase the flash eprom and program them using the new file.
If the operation is successfully ended, the following message will appear on
the screen.

403 / 671
18 / 24

404 / 671
9. Click on the OK button and abandon the flash eprom programmer utility.

405 / 671
19 / 24
12.7. SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETER LOADING

The EQUIPMENT calibration and setting data are permanently stored in the serial eeprom
mounted one each CPU board.
In case of need it is possible to force a total erase of the stored data by means of a specific
menu of the EQUIPMENT service routine.

At the end of the erase process, the serial eeprom will be automatically loaded with factory
default configuration/calibration parameters.
It must be underlined that an incorrect use of such utility will case the lost of the unit site
calibration data with the consequent need to perform a new unit calibration.

In case, for any reason, it is not possible to force software erase of the serial eeprom it is
possible to force a total reset setting, on each board, the specific jumper as described in
section10.

The serial eeprom store the value of software switches that allow the service
engineer to disable safety interlocks of the unit.
Such switches have the main porpoise to easy the trouble shooting operation of
field engineers, but can also dramatically reduce the safety level of the unit if
enabled during normal operation.
IS THEREFORE RESPONSABILITY OF THE FIELD ENGINEER TO
RESTORE THE CORRECT SETTING OF SUCH SWITCHES ONCE ERASED
THE SERIAL EEPROM.

407 / 671
20 / 24

408 / 671
12.8. EQUIPMENT MAIN CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND
DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING

1. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch EEPROM INIT icon and wait for the tilt menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Touch icon THREEPHASE.


The system will automatically erase the data contained into the main cpu serial eeprom and
then load the default calibration/configuration data.

4. Exit the service menu touching icon

409 / 671
21 / 24
12.9. CONSOLLE CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETERS
LOADING

1 Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch EEPROM INIT icon and wait for the tilt menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Touch icon CONSOLLE.


The system will automatically erase the data contained into the main CPU serial eeprom and
then load the default calibration/configuration data.

410 / 671
4. 22Exit
/ 24 the service menu touching icon

411 / 671
12.10. SFD CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT PARAMETERS
LOADING

1 Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch EEPROM INIT icon and wait for the tilt menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Touch icon SFD.


The system will automatically erase the data contained into the main CPU serial eeprom and
then load the default calibration/configuration data.

4. Exit the service menu touching icon

412 / 671
23 / 24
12.11. COLLIMATOR CPU SERIAL EEPROM ERASE AND DEFAULT
PARAMETERS LOADING

1 Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicated in section 8.3.1

2. Touch EEPROM INIT icon and wait for the tilt menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

3. Touch icon COLLIMATOR.


The system will automatically erase the data contained into the main CPU serial eeprom and
then load the default calibration/configuration data.

413 / 671
4. 24Exit
/ 24 the service menu touching icon

414 / 671
13. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The expected lifetime of the table is 10 years when maintenance is properly


carried out following the instructions contained in this section and in the Unit
Service Documentation.

The system remote tilting table, as any other technical apparatus, must be carefully used and
needs periodical maintenance as specified in the technical documentation.
Mecall srl is responsible for the safety of its products only in case their maintenance, repairing
or modification is carried out by Mecall or by personnel authorized by Mecall srl.

Mecall srl denies any responsibility for improper operation, damages or dangerous situations
caused directly or indirectly by non-respect of maintenance schedules.

13.1. USER MAINTENANCE

It's a good practice to survey on the following items:

Handgrips:

They are intended to keep the patient's hands away from potentially dangerous positions.
It's a good practice to leave them in place, and adjust and fix them for each patient.

Miscellany:

The operator must daily check that all the security and signaling circuits are fully operative.

The protection against electrical shocks has been realized grounding all the metal
covers of the unit.

Therefore it is imperative to check periodically the proper operation of the grounding system
of the examination room in which the remote tilting table has been installed according with the
regulations in force.

415 / 671
1 / 22
13.2. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

Mecall srl is responsible for the safety of its products only in case their
maintenance, repairing or modification is carried out by Mecall or by personnel
authorized by Mecall srl.

Make sure that the table is completely disconnected and that the emergency switches have
been activated, before starting any cleaning operations.

Make sure that no liquid can get into the unit.

Do not use water.


Water can short-circuit the electrical installation and cause corrosion to mechanical parts.

Painted parts can be cleaned with rags and products for cleaning plastic materials; after
cleaning give a finishing touch with a dry rag in whole.

Do not use acid or abrasive products.

Clean chrome-plated parts only with a dry rag in whole.


Use a wax that can be found on the market.

All the unit parts, including accessories and connection cables, should be disinfected only in
surface using a gaseous disinfectant.

For safety reasons do not use spray disinfectants.

In case of disinfecting of the whole examination room, take care to cover the unit using plastic
sheets.

In case of use of disinfectants, follow carefully the instructions reported for operations in
explosion hazard.

417 / 671
2 / 22

418 / 671
13.3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE – SCHEDULE

In order to ensure the maximum safety level for the patient and the operator it is absolute
necessary that the unit is periodically checked by a Mecall Authorized Service team in order
to maintain unchanged the original level of safety.

Mechanical parts such as chains, wires, ball bearings, etc. make part of this type of
equipment, which need regular inspections.
It is recommended to check frequently the conditions of the wires and in any way not to
exceed six months between checks.
Checks should be made at shorter time intervals in case the equipment is intensively used.
Special modifications or maintenance must be made exclusively by the manufacturer or by
expressly authorized personnel.

Table 13.1 list minimum preventive maintenance requirements to be performed by a qualified


technician or engineer.

The actual maintenance schedule at one particular site may deviate from the schedule given
here depending on equipment operating conditions. Please consult with your service
representative.

Table 13.1

AFTER 15000 EXPOSURES AFTER 60000 EXPOSURES


OR SIX-MOUNTHLY * OR ANNUALLY *

Service procedure see 13.4.1 Six-monthly Service procedure


Service procedure see 13.4.2 Service procedure see 13.4.9
Service procedure see 13.4.3 Service procedure see 13.4.11
Service procedure see 13.4.4 Service procedure see 13.4.12
Service procedure see 13.4.5 Service procedure see 13.4.13
Service procedure see 13.4.6 Service procedure see 13.4.14
Service procedure see 13.4.7 Service procedure see 13.4.19
Service procedure see 13.4.8 Service procedure see 13.4.20
Service procedure see 13.4.15
Service procedure see 13.4.16
Service procedure see 13.4.17
Service procedure see 13.4.18

It is also a good norm that the deputy engineer using the form of the following page records
each maintenance operation.

419 / 671
3 / 22
tipo di documento Document Id. Rev.

TABLE – MAINTENANCECHECK LIST 003E 1. 0

Unit s/n Installation date Installer signature

Service date Service operation type Engineer signature

4 / 22 421 / 671
13.4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE – INSPECTION

THE OPERATIONS DESCRIBED HEREAFTER MIGHT REQUIRE THE USE


OF X-RADIATION.
IN SUCH A CASE THE OPERATORS ARE REQUESTED TO TAKE ALL THE
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY TYPE OF
EXPOSURE WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT.

13.5. GENERAL

1. Check for external damage; investigate if necessary.

2. Operate all unit movement; investigate any strange noise (squealing,


scraping,) emanating from the system.

3. Remove the rear cover of the unit tilting assembly and check that there no oil
leakage from the gearbox assembly.

4. Check that the bolts fix the unit to the floor or to the base plate are tighten. In
the negative tighten them.

5. Check that the SFD mounting screws are properly tighten as described in
section 6.4

6. Check that the tube arm mounting screws are properly tighten as described
in section 6.5 of the manual.

7. Check that the collimator fixation grains 13 (see section 6.7) are properly
tighten.

8. Check that the trunnion rings screws 1 (see section 6.6) are properly
tighten.

9. Check that the x-ray tube fixation nuts 6 (see section 6.7) are properly
tighten.

13.6. END SWITCHES

1. Operate all table movements and check that the motor stops on the end of the travel
micro switches.
2. In the negative, replace and/or adjust the faulty micro switch as described in section
14.3 of the manual.

422 / 671
5 / 22
13.7. MOVEMENTS DECELERATION AREA CHECK

From the remote console, operate the tilt movement at the maximum speed.

1. Check that the movement automatically decelerates before touching the


+90°/-90° limit switch.

2. In the negative check the tilt and elevation potentiometers and sensing
circuit calibrations as described in sections 14.2 and 14.3.

3. From the remote console, operate the tube/SFD longitudinal movement at


the maximum speed.

4. Check that the movement automatically decelerates before touching the


limit switches.

5. In the negative check the column and SFD potentiometers and sensing
circuits calibration as described in sections 14.4 and 14.5

6. From the remote console, operate the tube incidence movement at the
maximum speed.

7. Check that the movement automatically decelerates before reaching the ±


40° limit positions.

13.8. SAFETY GROUND CONNECTION CHECK

Access table line input terminals.


Check that the line cable is firmly fixed by the related fixation clamps.
Check that the ground cable is firmly connected to the ground terminal.

424 / 671
6 / 22

425 / 671
13.9. TBT ELEVATION MOVEMENT SAFETY BRAKE CHECK

Operate the TBT elevation movement and check that the safety brake is properly released
and enabled.
In the negative, adjust the brake 24V dc power supply as described in section 14.1.
In case it is necessary the replacement of this brake, use the following instructions:

1. 3.a Disconnect the power supply plug 4 as shown in the following figure;
2. 3.b Remove the entire brakes assembly from the ball screw nut removing
screws 1 as shown in the following figure;
3. 3.c Remove screws 3 and replace the brakes with new ones.

426 / 671
7 / 22
13.9.1. COLLIMATOR LIGHT FIELD/X-RAY FIELD ACCURACY CHECK

1. Put a cassette loaded with a 24x30 cm film on the tabletop and select the
Direct mode.

2. Set the focus-film distance at 115 cm and project an illuminated field of


20x20 cm (measured on the cassette).

3. Expose and develop the film.

4. Measure, on the film, the error on both direction and verify that each error is
lower than 1,7 cm. In the negative, correct the alignment between the light
field and the x-ray field as described in section 9.2

13.9.2. BEAM ALIGNMENT CHECK

1. Switch the collimator lamp on and set the FFD at 105 cm.

2. On the tabletop mark the center of the collimator cross.

3. Move the FFD to 150 cm and check that the collimator cross remains
aligned with the previous mark. In the negative correct the tube alignment
as described in section 9.2.3

4. Insert a 24X30 cm cassette into the SFD.

5. Select the film full size and place over the tabletop a target (i.e. a washer) in
the center of the collimator cross.

6. Expose and develop the film.

7. Check that the used target appears in the center of the film. In the negative
correct the alignment of the beam with the cassette center as described in
section 9.2.3

8. Without touching the alignment, make fluoroscopy and check that the target
appears in the center of the monitor. In the negative correct the alignment of
the beam with the I.I. center as described in section 9.2.4.
13.9.3. COLLIMATOR ACCURACY CHECK

1. Insert a 24X30 cm cassette into the SFD.

2. Select the film full size and check that the size of the irradiated area
measured on the tabletop) is 20x 20 cm ± 17 mm of total error in both
direction.

3. Drive the focus film distance to the maximum value (150 cm) and and check
that the size of the irradiated area measured on the tabletop) is 20x 20 cm ±
25 mm of total error in both direction.

4. In the negative, correct the collimator calibration as described in section


16.6.

428 / 671
8 / 22

429 / 671
13.9.4. TBT ELEVATION SCREW INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION

1. Remove the tilting base covers to freely access the elevation screw.

2. Tilt the table from the horizontal to the +90° limit stop and check the proper
lubrication of the ball screw.

3. If necessary, clean the elevation ball screw using a soft rag. If necessary,
lubricate the screw as hereinafter described:

4. Remove the nut cap 1 as shown in the following figure;

5. Insert the grease in the main nut using a pump as shown in the following
figure;

6. The recommended lubricant is KLUBER - MICROLUBE GB00.

7. Insert the nut cap 1 and operate the tabletop vertical movement (tilting the
unit) to check that the screw is correctly lubricated.

8. Mount back the table covers.

430 / 671
9 / 22

431 / 671
13.9.5. TUBESTAND CHAIN INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION

1. Remove the tube stand covers 1 and 2 and the rear cover 3 to freely access
the tube stand chain as shown in the following figure.

2. Check the tube stand chain tilting the table from the horizontal to the +90°
limit stop. If necessary, lightly grease as shown in the following figure.
Wipe off excess of grease. The recommended lubricant is ESSO Cazar K
(R310-2026M).

NEVER OVER-LUBRICATE.
LUBRICANTS ARE STICKY AND SO TEND TO COLLECT DUST AND DIRT.

432 / 671
10 / 22

433 / 671
3. Move the tube stand along the entire travel in both direction and check that
the chain is well tensioned. In the negative, correct the tension of the chain
as hereinafter described:
4. Remove screws 4 to disconnect the stand assembly from the transmission
chain as shown in the following figure.

5. Slide the stand assembly away to freely access the chain bracket. Remove
screws 6 to remove the fixation bracket 5 from the transmission chain as
shown in the following figures:

434 / 671
11 / 22
6. Correct the chain tension acting on the central nut using a dynamometric
wrench set for 12 Nm maximum torque as shown in the following figure.

436 / 671
12 / 22

437 / 671
13.9.6. SFD CHAIN INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION

1. Remove front covers 1 to freely access the detector bucky chain as shown
in the following figure.

2. Check the chain and, if necessary, lightly grease as shown in the


following figure. Wipe off excess of grease. The recommended lubricant
is ESSO Cazar K (R310-2026M).

NEVER OVER-LUBRICATE.
LUBRICANTS ARE STICKY AND SO TEND TO COLLECT DUST AND DIRT.

3. Move detector bucky along the entire travel in both direction and check that
the chain is well tensioned. In the negative, correct the tension of the chain
as hereinafter described:
4. Remove screws 3 to disconnect the detector bucky from the chain as
shown in the following figure.

438 / 671
13 / 22
5. Slide the detector bucky assembly to freely access the chain tensioning nuts
as shown in the following figure:

6. Correct the chain tension acting on the central nut using a dynamometric
wrench set for 12 Nm maximum torque as shown in the following figure.

440 / 671
14 / 22

441 / 671
442 / 671
15 / 22
13.9.7. TBT ELEVATION POLY-V WARE-OUT AND BELT TENSION CHECK

1. Remove the tilt base upper cover to access the elevation movement
transmission belt as shown in the following figure.
2. Drive the elevation movement in the middle of its travel.
3. Move the elevation movement in both direction and check belts wear;
check that the belt runs smoothly. Switch the unit off.
4. Check the tension of the belt using a belt tension meter (such as TENS-SIT
from SIT spa). Position the probe of the meter in the middle of the pulleys
at the rear right side of the tower and hit the pulley as described in the user
manual 4 or 5 times. The correct tensioning is achieved when the average
of the measurements is about 165 Hz.
5. In the negative, correct the tension of the belt as hereinafter described:
5.1 Loosen the motor support fixation screws 1.
5.2 Correct the belt tension acting on nut 2 as shown in the figure.
5.3 Tighten the motor support fixation screws 1.

444 / 671
16 / 22

445 / 671
13.9.8. MAXIMUM COMPRESSION LIMIT SWITCH CHECK

1. From the SFD keyboard, drive the collimator in the field

2. Check the correct operation of the compression cone verifying that micro
switches FC28 and FC37 stop the movement when the compression force
specified in the following figure is applied.

3. In the negative, replace or adjust the limit switch as described in section


14.4.3

446 / 671
17 / 22
13.10. COMPRESSION CONE SAFETY LOCK OPERATION CHECK

1. From the SFD keyboard, drive the collimator in the field

2. Position a wood block under the collimator cone.

3. Drive the compression downward until the max. pressure limit switch stops
the movement.

4. Check that it is possible to release with a finger the compression cone


safety lock as shown in the following figure.

448 / 671
18 / 22

449 / 671
13.11. FILM DIVISION ACCURACY CHECK

1. Insert a cassette into the SFD.

2. Select the full size and place a target in the center of the collimator cross.

3. Expose the film and develop it.

4. Check that the target appears in the center of the film. In the negative, align
the cassette center with the SFD center as described in section 15.10 of
this manual.

5. Insert a 35x43 cm cassette a select a film division by 5.

6. Expose the film and develop it.

7. Check the distance between the divisions is correct and corresponding to


the customer's desire. In the negative, correct it as described in section
15.6 of this manual.

13.12. TOMOGRAPHY LAYER ACCURACY CHECK

1. Insert a cassette into the SFD.


2. Select the full size and place a tomography phantom in the center of the
collimator cross.
3. Make a tomo exposure with the tomo layer set at a generic value (i.e.100
mm).
4. Develop the film and check that the layer that appears on the film
corresponds to the actual value shown on the display.
5. In the negative correct the SFD tomography layer offset as described in
section 8.12 .

6. In case the unit is equipped with a Digital Image processor capable to


acquire images in tomography mode:

7. Select the Digital Image processor mode.


8. Select the I.I. full size and place a tomography phantom in the center of the
collimator cross.
9. Acquire a tomography image with the tomo layer set at a generic value
(i.e.100 mm).
10. Check that the layer that appears on the monitor corresponds to the actual
value shown on the display.
11. In the negative correct the DIGITAL tomography layer offset as described in
section 8.13

450 / 671
19 / 22
13.13. SFD CASSETTE FORMAT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM CHECK

1. Drive the table to its horizontal stop.

2. Insert different size cassettes into the SFD and check that the SFD CPU
recognizes all cassettes.

3. Drive the table to the +90° tilt position and repeat the previous test.

4. In case the SFD CPU fails to recognize a cassette format, check the
cassette proximity switch circuit as described in section 15.3 and carry out a
new calibration of the cassette format identification system as described in
section 15.6

13.14. SFD CASSETTE LIGHT CELL OPERATION CHECK

1. Drive the table to its horizontal stop.

2. Insert a 35x43 cassette in the cassette tray, with the 43-cm side in the
patient length.

3. Move a 10-mm spacer along the cassette side on the cassette tray handle
and verify that led 7 on the SFD interface board is never set on. That means
that the light cell safety circuit is correctly activated. Be careful to move the
spacer in the way that only the spacer can interrupt the light beam.

4. If necessary correct the alignment of the safety light cell as described in


section 15.7

452 / 671
20 / 22

453 / 671
13.15. SFD NEAR FILM SHUTTERS DRIVE TOOTHED BELT TENSION CHECK

1. Drive the table to its horizontal stop.

2. Drive the tabletop to its external limit stop and remove the SFD cover 3 as shown in
the following figure.

3. Enter in service mode and move the near film shutters as described in section 15
Check the belt wear; check that the belt runs smoothly. Replace it if necessary.

4. Check that the belt is well tensioned with a maximum float of 10 mm. In the negative,
correct the tension of the toothed belt using the following procedure:

5. Remove cover 2 as shown in the following figure.


6. Loosen nuts 5 and 4.
7. Tighten screw 6 until the correct tension is reached.
8. Tighten nuts 5 and 4.
9. Mount the SFD covers.

454 / 671
21 / 22
13.16. SFD CASSETTE DRIVE FOR BELT TENSION CHECK

1. Drive the table to its horizontal stop.

2. Drive the tabletop to its external limit stop and remove the SFD cover 3 as shown in
the following figure.

3. Move the cassette tray in/out and check belts wear; check that the belt runs smoothly.
4. Replace it if necessary.

5. Check that the belt is well tensioned with a maximum float of 10 mm. In the negative,
correct the tension of the toothed belt using the following procedure:

6. Remove cover 2 as shown in the following figure.


7. Loosen nuts 5 and 4.
8. Tighten screw 6 until the correct tension is reached.
9. Tighten nuts 5 and 4.
10. Mount the SFD covers.

456 / 671
22 / 22

457 / 671
14. TABLE CORRETTIVE MAINTENANCE

14.1. TILT BRAKE 24V DC ADJUSTMENT

The coils of the magnetic brake mounted on the tilt motor shaft is supplied by means of a
switching power supply that allows an independent voltage regulation.
The suggested adjustment procedure is the following:

1. Using the buttons located on the remote console, enable the Tilt movement and check if
the brake is correctly released and engaged.
2. In the negative, remove the side cover to access the main electronics board and correct
the dc voltage power supply by means of trimmer PT3, as shown in the following figure.
3. Repeat the test until the optimum calibration has been found.

1 /458
34 / 671
14.2. POTENTIOMETERS REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

14.2.1. INTRODUCTION

The software calibration procedure described in section 8 of this manual are valid if the
analogue sensing circuits of the multi-turns potentiometer used as position detectors of the
remote tilting table movements have been adjusted.

In order to get the optimum dynamic range from the potentiometer signals it is necessary that
the potentiometer itself be mechanically coupled to the movement and that the end of the travel
micro switches be properly adjusted as described in the present section of the manual.

459 / 671
2 / 34

460 / 671
14.2.2. TABLE ELEVATION POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

Do not tight too much the nut that lock the potentiometer to the supporting bracket in
order to prevent damages to the potentiometer itself.

1. Remove the front covers to access the elevation potentiometer as shown in the
following figure. Register the correspondence between wire color and the
potentiometer terminal.

2. Enter the unit maintenance mode as described in section “first unit switch on”

3. Touch ELEVATION icon and wait for the elevation menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

4. Using joystick 37 drive the tabletop to the lowest limit position. In case of need to
combine the elevation movement with the tilting movement to reach the required
position.

461 / 671
3 / 34
5. Remove the nut 1 that fix the translator wire.

6. Remove screws 2 and replace the translator with a new one.

7. Tension the translator wire rope and fix it by means of nut 1.

8. Resume the replacement procedure from step 3.

9. Adjust the Zero value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO of the
zero calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the previous figure. The
unit main CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer sensing circuit and store the
minimum value (Zero) into the serial eeprom.

463 / 671
4 / 34

464 / 671
10. Using joystick 37 drive the tabletop to its highest limit stop. In case of need combine the
elevation movement with the elevation movement to reach the required position.

11. Adjust the Gain value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO of the gain
calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the previous figure. The unit main
CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer sensing circuit and store the maximum
value into the serial eeprom.

12. Exit the elevation service menu touching icon

465 / 671
5 / 34

466 / 671
14.2.3. TABLE TILT POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the front covers to access the tilt potentiometer as shown in the following
figure. Register the correspondence between wire color and the potentiometer
terminal.

2. Enter the unit maintenance mode as described in section 8.3.

3. Touch TILT icon and wait for the elevation menu to appear on the touch screen display
as shown in the following figure.

4. Using joystick 37 to tilt the unit to the +90° position. Do position the carriage in
order to make visible the potentiometer for an easier access to the potentiometer
assembly.

5. Release spring 6 and loosen grain 2 to remove gear 3 from the potentiometer
shaft, by pushing the potentiometer support away from the transmission gear 1.

6. Remove nut 4 and replace the old potentiometer with a new 1K-10 turns
potentiometer.

7. Connect the wires to the potentiometer terminals as previously noted.

Do not tight too much the nut that lock the potentiometer to the supporting
bracket in order to prevent damages to the potentiometer itself.

467 / 671
6 / 34

468 / 671
8. Rotate the potentiometer anticlockwise and do rotate again a quarter of the turn
clockwise

9. Adjust the Zero value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO of the
zero calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the previous figure. The
unit main CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer sensing circuit and store
the minimum value (Zero) into the serial eeprom.

10. Using joystick 37 tilt the unit to the -90° position.

11. Adjust the Gain value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO of
the gain calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the previous figure.
The unit main CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer sensing circuit and
store the maximum value into the serial eeprom.

12. Store the position of the horizontal


stop for tilting movement as described in
section 8.5 of the manual.

469 / 671
13. Exit the tilting service menu touching icon

7 / 34

470 / 671
14.2.4. COLUMN LONGITUDINAL POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT &
ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the Unit main frame right rear cover to access the column position
sensing potentiometer as shown in the following figure. Register the
correspondence between wire colour and the potentiometer terminal.

2. Enter the unit maintenance mode as described in section 8.3.1

3. Touch COLUMN icon and wait for the column menu to appear on the touch
screen display as shown in the following figure.

471 / 671
8 / 34

472 / 671
4. Using joystick 44 or 40 drive the tube stand to its left limit stop. Make sure
that the end of the travel micro switch is activated. In the negative an error
message will appear on the touch screen display.

5. Remove screws 1 and the entire potentiometer supporting bracket.

6. Loosen grain 3 to remove gear 4 from the potentiometer shaft, by pushing


the potentiometer support away from the reduction gear.

7. Remove nut 5 and replace the old potentiometer with a new 1K-10 turns
potentiometer. Connect the wires to the potentiometer terminals as
previously noted.

Do not tight too much the nut that lock the potentiometer to the supporting
bracket in order to prevent damages to the potentiometer itself.

8. Rotate the potentiometer shaft CW to the end of its travel and go back by
1/4 of turn

9. Mount the potentiometer bracket and couple the reduction gear with the
transmission gear.

10. Tighten screws 1 when the correct coupling is achieved.

The correct coupling of the reduction gear with the transmission gear is achieved
when it is possible to detect a small float between the two gears. A tight coupling of
the two gears could damage the potentiometer bushing.

473 / 671
9 / 34
11. Adjust the Zero value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO
of the zero calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The main CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer
sensing circuit and store the minimum value (Zero) into the serial eeprom.

12. Using joystick 44 or 40 drive the tube stand to its right limit stop. Make sure
that the end of the travel micro switch is activated. In the negative an error
message will appear on the touch screen display.

13. Adjust the Gain value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO
of the gain calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The main CPU will automatically calibrate the potentiometer
sensing circuit and store the maximum value into the serial eeprom.

14. Exit the column service menu touching icon

475 / 671
10 / 34

476 / 671
14.2.5. SFD POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the Unit main frame left front cover to access the bucky position
sensing potentiometer as shown in the following figure. Register the
correspondence between wire colour and the potentiometer terminal.

2. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1


3. Touch SFD icon and wait for the detector menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

4. Drive the tube incidence to its 0° position with joystick 40

477 / 671
11 / 34

478 / 671
5. Using joystick 44 to drive the SFD to its left limit stop and make sure that the
end of the travel micro switch is activated. In the negative an error message
will appear on the touch screen display.
6. Remove screws 1 and the entire potentiometer supporting bracket.
7. Loosen grain 3 to remove gear 4 from the potentiometer shaft, by pushing
the potentiometer support away from the reduction gear.
8. Remove nut 5 and replace the old potentiometer with a new 1K-10 turns
potentiometer. Connect the wires to the potentiometer terminals as
previously noted.

Do not tight too much the nut that lock the potentiometer to the supporting bracket in
order to prevent damages to the potentiometer itself.

9. Rotate the potentiometer shaft CW to the end of its travel and go back by 1/4
of turn

10. Mount the potentiometer bracket and couple the reduction gear with the
transmission gear. Tighten screws 1 when the correct coupling is achieved.

The correct coupling of the reduction gear with the transmission gear is achieved
when it is possible to detect a small float between the two gears. A tight coupling of
the two gears could damage the potentiometer bushing.

479 / 671
12 / 34

480 / 671
11. Adjust the Zero value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO
of the zero calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The Unit main CPU will automatically calibrate the
potentiometer sensing circuit and store the minimum value (Zero) into the
serial eeprom.

12. Using joystick 44 drive the SFD to its right limit stop. Make sure that the end
of the travel micro switch is activated.

13. Adjust the Gain value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon AUTO
of the gain calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The Table main CPU will automatically calibrate the
potentiometer sensing circuit and store the maximum value into the serial
eeprom.

14. Exit the detector bucky service menu


touching icon

481 / 671
13 / 34

482 / 671
14.2.6. FFD POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

Do not tight too much the nut that lock the potentiometer to the supporting bracket in
order to prevent damages to the potentiometer itself.

1. Remove the table tube stand cover to access the FFD potentiometer
assembly as shown in the following figure. Register the correspondence
between wire color and the potentiometer terminal.

2. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

3. Touch FFD icon and wait for the FFD menu to appear on the touch screen
display as shown in the following figure.

483 / 671
14 / 34

484 / 671
TABLE CALIBRATION (Table version 4.0)

1_
TILT
FFD Calibration

ZERO ELEVATION

MIN
COLUMN
100 2110 3110 4110 5110 6110 7110 8110 9110 10'23

SFD
GAIN 799
MAX
INCIDENCE
0 11::0 2111031110 41110 51110 61110 71110 81110 91110 10'23

FFD

JOYS TICKS

EEPROM INIT

OPTIONS

R1 ERROR LOG

4. Using button 42 drive the FFD movement to its minimum limit stop (FFD= 115
c m)

485 / 671
15 / 34
In order to remove and replace the potentiometer/translator
1K-10 turns, follow the steps written below:

Remove the first CN506 PIN of the four


one Figure 1)

Figure 1

1. Loose the translator wire stand upper nut


(1) and remove the two fixing translator screws
(2) as shown in Figure 2.

2. Replace the translator with the new one


1
3. Tension the translator wire rope and fix it
to the column wire bar in its upper part (1)
(Figure 2)
2

Figure 2

5. Adjust the Zero value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon MIN
of the zero calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The CLSIS EXEL main CPU will automatically calibrate the
potentiometer sensing circuit and store the minimum value (Zero) into the
serial eeprom.

6. Using button 43 drive the FFD movement to its maximum limit stop (FFD=150
or 180 cm).

7. Adjust the Gain value of the potentiometer sensing circuit touching icon MAX
of the gain calibration row on the touch screen display as shown in the
previous figure. The table main CPU will automatically calibrate the
potentiometer sensing circuit and store the maximum value into the serial
eeprom.

8..Using button 42 drive the FFD movement to its minimum limit stop (FFD= 115
cm)

9. Exit the FFD service menu touching icon

487 / 671
16 / 34

488 / 671
14.3. END SWITCHES REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

14.3.1. INTRODUCTION

The calibration procedure described in section 14.2 of this manual mainly consists in the
adjustment of the analogue sensing circuits of the multi-turns potentiometer used as position
detectors of the remote tilting table movements.
In order to get the optimum dynamic range from the potentiometer signals it is necessary that
the end of the travel micro switches be properly adjusted as described in the present section of
the manual.

489 / 671
17 / 34
14.3.2. TABLE ELEVATION END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the base covers to access the elevation end switches assemblies
as shown in the following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one by removing


the fixation nuts 3 and 5.

3. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1 and drive the
unit to the lower limit position.

4. Release screws 6 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it in
order to activate micro switch FC38. In case of need adjust the transverse
position of the micro switch by releasing the fixation nuts 5. Tighten screws 6.

5. Drive the unit to the upper limit position.

6. Release screws 1 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it in
order to activate micro switch FC37. In case of need adjust the transverse
position of the micro switch by releasing the fixation nuts 3. Tighten screws 1.

7. Adjust the elevation potentiometer sensing circuit as described in


section 14.2 of the manual.

491 / 671
18 / 34

492 / 671
14.3.3. TABLE TILT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the towers cover to access the TILT end switches as shown in the
following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one by removing


the fixation nuts.

3. Enter the unit maintenance mode as indicted in section 8.3.1 and tilt the unit
to the -90° limit angle.

4. Release screws 2 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it
in order to activate micro switch FC2. In case of need adjust the transverse
position of the micro switch by releasing the fixation nuts. Tighten screws 2.

5. Tilt the unit to the +90° limit angle.

6. Release screws 4 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it
in order to activate micro switch FC1. In case of need adjust the transverse
position of the micro switch by releasing the fixation nuts. Tighten screws 4.

7. Adjust the TILT potentiometer sensing circuit as described in section 14.2 of


the manual.

493 / 671
19 / 34
14.3.4. TUBESTAND LONGITUDINAL TRAVEL END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the UNIT tube stand covers 1 and 2 access the tube stand end
switches as shown in the following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one by removing


the fixation screws 3.

3. Drive the tube stand to its left limit position.

4. Release screws 3 hat lock the micro switch FC33 on the bracket. Adjust its
vertical position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of
the travel cam 10
5. Tighten screws 3

6. Drive the tube stand to its right limit position.

7. Release screws 3 hat lock the micro switch FC34 on the bracket. Adjust its
vertical position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of
the travel cam 10
8. Tighten screws 3

9. Adjust the tube stand potentiometer sensing circuit as described in


section 14.2 of the manual.

495 / 671
20 / 34

496 / 671
14.3.5. SFD END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the SFD bottom cover 2 to access the SFD end switches as shown
in the following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one by removing


the fixation screws

3. Drive the SFD to its left limit position.

4. Release screws 4 that lock the micro switch FC13 on the bracket. Adjust its
vertical position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of
the travel cam 9.

5. Tighten screws 4.

6. Drive the SFD to its right limit position.

7. Release screws 4 that lock the micro switch FC12 on the bracket. Adjust its
vertical position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of
the travel cam 9.

8. Tighten screws 4.

9. Adjust the SFD potentiometer sensing circuit as described in section 14.2 of


the manual.

497 / 671
21 / 34

498 / 671
14.3.6. TUBE FFD END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the Unit tube stand cover to access the FFD end switches as shown
in the following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one.

3. Drive the FFD to the lower limit position (FFD = 115 cm).

4. Release screws 4 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it
in order to activate micro switch 3 (FC22). Tighten screws 4.

5. Drive the telescopes to the upper limit position (FFD = 150 cm or 180 cm).

6. Release screws 1 that lock the entire micro switches assembly and adjust it
in order to activate micro switch 2 (FC23). Tighten screws 1.

499 / 671
22 / 34

500 / 671
7. Adjust the FFD potentiometer sensing circuit as described in section 14.2 of
the manual.

501 / 671
23 / 34
14.3.7. TUBE ROTATION SENSE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the table tube cover 2 to access the rotation sense switch as shown in the
following figure.

2. Remove the tube fan support 7 and the cables holder 5. Remove screw 8 and loosen
screw 9 as shown in the following figure.

3. Tilt the rotation switch support 10 and remove the fixation nut 11. Replace the sense
switch 13 (FC24) with a new one as shown in the following figure.

503 / 671
24 / 34

504 / 671
4. Adjust the vertical position of the switch 13 in the way that the switch is activated when
the x-ray tube is aligned with the SFD center. Lock the fixation nut 11.

505 / 671
25 / 34
14.4. TABLETOP LATERAL TRAVEL END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

The tabletop lateral travel end switches are integrated into the linear actuator that
can not be opened on site.
For this reason, in case one of the two end switches is defective, it is necessary to
replace the entire actuator as hereinafter described.

1. Remove the actuator cover 4 located on the external side of the


right tabletop support arm as shown in the following figure.

2. Remove nuts 7 and 8 to disconnect the actuator from the


tabletop assembly as shown in the following figure.

507 / 671
26 / 34

508 / 671
3. Remove cover 11 as shown in the following figure;

4. Disconnect the end switches plug and the power supply plug as shown
in the following figure.

5. Replace the actuator with a new one and mount it carrying out, in
the reverse order, the previous instructions.

27 / 34509 / 671
14.5. COMPRESSOR: PARKING MOVEMENT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the compression cone assembly 4 after having loosen screws 3, and
cover 6 to access the maximum pressure sense switch as shown in the
following figure. Remove also the bottom cover to better access the end
switches assembly.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one.

3. Drive the compression cone in the parking position.

4. Release screws 2 that lock the support of the micro switch (FC27) 3. Adjust
its position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of the
travel cam. Tighten screws 2.
5. In case of need, loosen the switch fixations crews and correct the position of
the switch in respect with its supporting bracket.
6. Drive the compression cone in the field.

7. Release screws 2 that lock support of the micro switch (FC26) 4. Adjust its
position in the way that the micro switch is activated by the end of the travel
cam . Tighten screws 2.
8. In case of need, loosen the switch fixations crews and correct the position of
the switch in respect with its supporting bracket.

510 / 671
28 / 34

511 / 671
512 / 671
29 / 34
14.6. COMPRESSOR: VERTICAL MOVEMENT END SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the compression cone assembly 4 after having loosen screws 3, and
cover 6 to access the maximum pressure sense switch as shown in the
following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one removing the
fixation screws 2.

3. Drive the compression cone up (FC30) and down (FC29) to check the
proper operation of both end switches. In case of need correct the position of
the end of the travel cams by loosening screws 1 and 5.

514 / 671
30 / 34

515 / 671
14.7. COMPRESSOR: MAX. PRESSURE SENSE SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the compression cone assembly 4 after having loosen screws 3, and
cover 6 to access the maximum pressure sense switch as shown in the
following figure.

2. In case of faulty micro switch replace it with a new one, removing screws 3 as
shown in the following figures.

516 / 671
31 / 34

517 / 671
3. Check the correct operation of the compression cone verifying that micro
switches FC28 and FC42 stop the movement when the compression force
specified in the following figure is applied.

4. In the negative, modify the activation force adjusting the position of the
supporting bracket loosening nuts 1 and 2 as shown in the previous figures.

518 / 671
32 / 34

519 / 671
14.8. COMPRESSION CONE FORCE CALIBRATION

The calibration of the compression cone maximum pressure sensing circuit, must be
carried out as hereinafter described:

1. Turn trimmer R40 completely CCW

2. Turn trimmer R52 to obtain between pin1 and pin2 of C67 a voltage equal 29V
(speed up/dw)

3. Turn trimmer R51 to obtain between pin1 and pin2 of C65 a voltage equal 29V
(speed in/out compressor)

4. Turn trimmer R88 to obtain between pin1 and pin2 of C92 a voltage equal 2V (current limit
compressor-down)

520 / 671
33 / 34
522 / 671
34 / 34

523 / 671
15. SFD CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
15.1. FOREWORD

The remote tilting table Spot Film Device is equipped with a software package that allows the
service personnel to set various configurations and calibration parameters, that are stored
into the CPU serial eeprom. To run the service software is necessary to enter the unit
maintenance mode carrying out the following procedure:
1. Open the control desk to access the touch screen assembly

2. Insert the Mecall USB service license key in the USB connector of the
touch screen CPU board as described in the following figure

3. Switch the system on and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch
screen display as shown in the following figure.

4. Touch service tools icon and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch

screen display as shown in the following figure.

524 / 671
1 / 19

525 / 671
DO ALWAYS MAKE REFERENCE TO THE PREVIOUS JUMPING
SETTINGS BEFORE ANY FURTHERMORE ADJUSTMENTS

5. At this point it is possible to perform the unit set-up by pressing push button
“OPTION”

Make reference to chapter 11.1 for possible set up

When the unit enters the maintenance mode, the most of the safety controls
are disabled. In particular:
1. The Anti collision routine is disabled;
2. All safety controls related with potentiometers and encoders sensing circuits are
disabled;
3. All movements can be operated by the service personnel only at the control desk
side.
Only the end of the travel micro switches can stop the movements;
4. The feedback signals from all power drivers are ignored;
5. The movements speed can be modified only by the sensing potentiometer value
(low speed close to travel limits )
FOR SUCH REASONS SERVICE PERSONNELL IS REQUESTED TO OPERATE
THE UNIT BEING VERY CAREFULL NOT TO PRODUCE DAMAGES TO THE
UNIT AND/OR INJURY ANY OTHER PERSON PRESENTS IN THE ROOM.

526 / 671
In maintenance mode the SFD keyboard pushbuttons have a different meaning.
So be sure to press only the key specified in each single procedure.

THE SFD CPU IS ABLE TO RECOGNIZE BOTH MILLIMETRIC AND INCHES


CASSETTES. IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THE CALIBRATION
PROCEDURES FOR MILLIMETRIC CASSETTES ARE EXPLAINED.
IN ORDER TO CALIBRATE A SFD USING INCHES CASSETTE IT IS ENOUGH
TO FOLLOW THE SAME PROCEDURES USING A 10” X 12” CASSETTE
INSTEAD OF A 24 X 30 CASSETTE.

527 / 671
3 / 19

528 / 671
15.2. CASSETTE TRAY MICRO SWITCHES MECHANICAL SETTING

This calibration allows setting the cassette movements run limits and consist on the
regulation of the two ends of travel micro switches.

Parking position micro switch mechanical setting

This calibration is carried out by displacing the cam that depresses the cassette holder limit
switch.

1. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15.

2. Remove the SFD top cover to access the parking position micro switch

3. Insert a generic cassette into the SFD and park it.

4. Check that the distance that remains between the bottom of the spot film
device and the rear side of the cassette holder is 10 mm as shown in the
following figure.
5. In the positive it is not necessary to adjust the position of the micro switch
and it is possible to jump to step 8, otherwise correct the position of the cam
that activates the cassette parking position limit switch as hereinafter
described.

6. Press button 15 and move the cassette tray away from the parking position
to free the limit micro switch. Adjust, if necessary, the position of the limit
micro switch FC7 by releasing screws A as shown in the following figure.

7. Loosen screws B and position the cassette tray cam as determined in step
4. Tighten screws B.

8. Press button 14 and drive the cassette tray to the parking position. Return to
step 4.

9. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON
again.

529 / 671
External stop micro switch mechanical setting

1. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15.

2. Remove the steel cover that protects the micro switch as shown in the following figure

3. Press button 15 and move the cassette tray to the external of the SFD until it stops on
the limit micro switch.

4. Check that the stop position allows an easy introduction of the cassette in the tray. In the
positive jump to step 8, otherwise continue with the adjustment procedure.

5. Press button 14 and move the cassette tray away from the external position to free the
limit micro switch.

6. Correct the micro switch position loosening the screws that hold the micro switch
supporting plate as shown in the following figure.

530 / 671
5 / 19

531 / 671
7. Tighten the micro switch supporting plate screws, and return to step 3.

8. Mount the steel cover.

9. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON again.

532 / 671
15.3. PROXIMITY SWITCH SENSING CIRCUITS CALIBRATION

With the SFD is used one magnetic proximity switch to recognize the cassette format for the
correct exposure release. Hereinafter there is the correct calibration procedure of the
proximity switch sensing circuit.

Cassette tray proximity switch sensing circuit calibration

1. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15.

2. Remove the SFD bottom cover to access the SFD CPU board.

3. Using pushbuttons 14 and 15, move slowly the cassette tray in the way that it passes
more times, in the two directions, over the proximity switch.

4. Check that when the 2 metal plates mounted on the bottom side of the cassette tray pass
over the proximity switch, the corresponding signalling led LD9 lights shortly.

5. In the negative, check that in all tilt conditions the bottom plates of the cassette tray are
set at about 2-3 mm. from the proximity sensor input surface. If this distance is not
correct, modify it adding or removing spacers under the proximity switch board. If the
distance is correct, turn potentiometer PT2 to correct the sensitivity of the sense circuit.

6. Calibrate the cassette format identification system as described in section 15.6 and 15.8
of the manual.

7. Mount the SFD bottom cover.

8. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON again

533 / 671
7 / 19

534 / 671
15.4. NEAR FILM SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT

The calibration of the near film shutters is divided into 2 parts:

A) Parallelism calibration;

B) Shutters maximum open limit micro switch setting.

Before carrying out these two following adjustments check that the cable that leads the blades
is correctly mounted.

Parallelism regulation

1. Remove the tabletop assembly carrying out, in the reverse order, the instructions
contained in section 6.9

2. Remove the SFD upper cover as shown in the following figure.

3. Using buttons 8 and 10 drive the near film shutters approximately halfway.

4. Measure the distances between the back of the spot film device and the right and left
extremities of the most internal blade.

5. If these distances are equal, the internal blade is well aligned, otherwise correct the
parallelism by releasing screws 2 as shown in the following figure.

Consider the centre of the spot film device (indicated by two markers on the
SFD chassis) and adjust the position of the most external blade so as to
obtain the symmetry of the two blades in respect to the above centre.

535 / 671
Shutters maximum open limit micro switch setting.

6. Pressing button 08 open by small steps the shutters until the limit switch is activated.

7. Measure the distance between the blades and check if it is equal to 43.5 cm.

8. In the negative, proceed as follows:

a) Close the shutters pressing button 10.

b) Loosen screws A and B to correct the position of the limit micro switch FC11 as
shown in the following figure.
c) Resume the procedure from step 8.

9. Mount the SFD bottom cover.

10. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON again

11. Switch the table on and check the correct film division. If necessary, adjust it following
the instructions contained in section 15.5

536 / 671
9 / 19

537 / 671
If the switch is moved backward, the shutters shall open more, if it is moved
forward they will open less; besides, the displacement of 1 mm. of the switch
causes a variation of 2 mm. (the double) in the opening distance of the shutters.

538 / 671
15.5. ADJUSTMENT OF SFD DIVISION

THE OPERATIONS DESCRIBED HEREAFTER REQUIRE THE USE OF X--


RADIATION.CONSEQUENTLY THE OPERATORS ARE REQUESTED TO TAKE
ALL THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY TYPE OF
EXPOSURE WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT.

1. Insert a generic cassette into the SFD and park it.

2. Select a film division.

3. Expose the film as many times as it is necessary and develop it.

4. Check the distance between the divisions and, if necessary, modify it carrying out the
following procedure:

a. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15

b. Press button 01 to enable the film division setting routine


If the film division routine has been enabled, led 07 and 09 will be turned OFF.

c. Press button the distance between the divisions must be reduced or button 08 if
this distance must be increased.

Each time the button is pressed the distance is increased or reduced by 1.0 mm
step; led 09 shows the activation of button 10, while led 07 shows the activation
of button 08.

d. When the desired adjustment has been achieved, press key 01 to store in the
80C166 CPU eeprom the new calibration data and automatically exit the film
division setting routine.

5. Exit the service mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON again

6. Expose another film to verify the correct setting of film division and, if necessary, repeat
the adjustment procedure until the desired result is reached.

539 / 671
11 / 19

540 / 671
15.6. CALIBRATION OF CASSETTE FORMAT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
This procedure is to be carried out each time one of the following cases verifies:

A) The cassette in limit stop cam is moved from its calibration position.

B) For any reason the proximity switch that detects the cassette size is disassembled or
reassembled (this proximity is fixed on the spot film device structure near the parallax
correction carriage).

C) At the time of the new installation because the cassettes of various manufacturers
normally have external dimensions slightly different.

D) Each time the spot film device does not identify any more the cassette size. In this
case, before carrying out again this calibration make sure that the cassette is not
defective (maybe deformed).

For carrying out the following procedure a 24x30 cm. cassette must be used:

1. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15.

2. Bring the cassette tray outside (if it is necessary) using button 18.

3. Load the SFD with a 24x30 cm. cassette with the 24-cm. side in the
direction of the cassette holder displacement (with the 30-cm. side in the
direction of patient's length)

4. Do move the cassette tray by pressing the small keyboard 18 button

5. Press pushbutton 12.

6. This key orders to the spot film device microprocessor to memorize the
cassette position, in the non-volatile memory. Such parameters are offsets
by means of which, subsequently, the microprocessor itself is able to identify
any other cassette size.

7. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON
again.

541 / 671
15.7. CASSETTE SAFETY LIGHT CELL ADJUSTMENT

IN CASE IS NOT POSSIBLE TO OBTAIN A GOOD ADJUSTMENT, CHECK


THAT THE CASSETTE DEFLECTOR DOES NOT PUSH DOWNWARD
THE CASSETTE. IF NECESSARY ADJUST IT.

Remove the SFD lower covers. Remove the SFD electronic sub rack cover to freely access
the electronic boards.

1. Access the light cell assembly by removing cover 1 and the protection bar 5.
These parts are mounted on the SFD chassis by means of screws 7, 4 and
6.

2. Disable the light cell safety.

3. Switch the unit on, and drive the table to its horizontal stop position.

4. Insert a 35x43 cassette in the cassette tray, with the 43-cm side in the
patient length.

5. Move a 10-mm spacer along the cassette side on the cassette tray handle
and verify that LED 1 on the SFD CPU is never set on. That means that the
light cell safety circuit is correctly activated. Be careful to move the spacer in
the way that only the spacer can interrupt the light beam.

6. In case there are positions in which the safety circuit is not activated, adjust
the self-locking nut 3 to properly align the infrared beam.

7. Move a 5-mm spacer along the cassette side on the cassette tray handle
and verify that LED 1 on the SFD CPU is always ON. That means that the
light cell safety circuit is never activated.

8. In case there are positions in which the safety circuit is activated, adjust the
self-locking nut 3 to properly align the infrared beam. Repeat the adjustment
procedure from point 5.

9. Check proper light cell alignment tilting the table to +90° and moving in/out
several time the cassette. Repeat the test with different cassette formats.

10. Mount back cover 1, the sub rack cover and the SFD lower covers.

11. Enable the light cell safety.

542 / 671
13 / 19

543 / 671
544 / 671
15.8. ALIGNMENT OF CASSETTE CENTRE WITH SFD CENTRE.

THIS PROCEDURE MUST BE CARRIED OUT ONLY WITH THE 24 X 30


CASSETTE INSERTED IN THE SPOT FILM DEVICE IN THE SAME
WAY DONE FOR THE CASSETTE SIZE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
CALIBRATION.

1. Enter the SFD service mode as described in section 15.

2. Clear the data contained in the EEPROM and in the RAM, pressing button
06.

3. Carry out the cassette size identification system calibration making that
procedure from step 2 to step 5 of this chapter at section 15.6

4. Press Pushbutton 03.

5. Check that the center of the cassette is aligned with the center of the spot
film device. In the negative modify the position of the cassette center using
buttons 07 or 09.

6. When the position is considered to be the correct one depress pushbutton


12 to store the new position in the eeprom.

7. Exit the maintenance mode by pressing the unit OFF and switch it ON
again.

545 / 671
15 / 19

546 / 671
15.9. GRID REPLACEMENT

The grid can be removed from the SFD using the following suggested procedure:

1. Remove the tabletop assembly carrying out, in the reverse order, the
instructions contained in section 6.9.

2. Remove the SFD upper cover as shown in the following figure.

3. Close the near film shutters 2 and remove screws 3 as shown in the
following figure.

4. Open up to the maximum size the near film shutters and remove screws 5
that fix the AEC detector fixation brackets as shown in the following figures.

547 / 671
5. Remove the AEC detector 7 with its fixation brackets 6. Remove Grid 8 as shown in the
following figure:

6. Replace the grid and carry out the previous instructions in the reverse order.:

THE GRID IS GENERALLY INSTALLED IN FACTORY DURING THE UNIT FINAL


TESTS. FOR THIS REASON, DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION YOU ARE NOT
REQUIRED TO INSTALL THE GRID UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

548 / 671
17 / 19

549 / 671
15.10. AEC DETECTOR REPLACEMENT

THE AEC DETECTOR IS GENERALLY INSTALLED IN FACTORY DURING THE


UNIT FINAL TESTS. FOR THIS REASON, DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION YOU
ARE NOT REQUIRED TO INSTALL THE AEC DETECTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED.

1. The AEC detector can be removed from the SFD using the following
suggested procedure:

2. Remove the tabletop assembly carrying out, in the reverse order, the
instructions contained in section 6.9.

3. Remove the SFD upper cover as shown in the following figure.

4. Close the near film shutters 2 and remove screws 3 as shown in the
following figure.

5. Open up to the maximum size the near film shutters and remove screws 5
that fix the AEC detector fixation brackets as shown in the following figures.

550 / 671
6. Remove the AEC detector 7 with its fixation brackets 6.

7. Replace the AEC detector and carry out the previous instructions in the
reverse order.:

551 / 671
19 / 19

552 / 671
16. COLLIMATOR CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
16.1. FOREWORD

The table collimator is equipped with a software package that allows the service personnel to
set various configurations and calibration parameters, that are stored into the collimator CPU
serial eeprom. To run the service software is necessary to enter the unit maintenance mode
carrying out the following procedure:
1. Open the control desk to access the touch screen assembly.
Insert the Mecall USB service license key in the USB connector of the touch screen CPU
board as described in the following figure

2. Switch the system on and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch screen display
as shown in the following figure.

553 / 671
1 / 18

554 / 671
3. Touch service tools icon and wait for the service menu to appear on the touch screen

display as shown in the following figure.

WARNING:
In maintenance mode the collimator keyboard buttons have a different meaning. So
be sure to press only the key specified in each single procedure.

DO ALWAYS MAKE REFERENCE TO THE PREVIOUS JUMPING


SETTINGS BEFORE ANY FURTHERMORE ADJUSTMENTS

4. At this point it is possible to perform the unit set-up by pressing push button “OPTION” .

5. Make reference to chapter 11.1 for possible set up

2 / 555
18 / 671
16.2. OPTICAL SWITCHES REPLACEMENT

In order to correctly operate the collimator the optical switches that prevent the shutters to reach
the complete end of the run must be correctly adjusted.
The suggested procedure is the following:

1 Remove the collimator covers.

2 Enter the maintenance routine as described in chapter Errore. L'origine riferimento non è
stata trovata.

3 By means of pushbuttons 3 and 4 drive the transverse shutters up to a closure of 2 mm,


corresponding to 13 mm light on the tabletop.

4 Release screws 5.D to free the metal bracket 7.D of the transverse optical switch.

5 Position the metal bracket 7.D in the way that the optical switch is activated only when
the shutters are in this condition. The activation of the optical switch can be verified
looking at the FFD display. If the transverse optical switch is not activated, the first digit
of the display is 1, while if the switch is activated the digit is 0.

6 Lock screws 5.D and verify that the optical switch is properly calibrated.

7 By means of pushbuttons 6 and 7 drive the longitudinal shutters up to a closure of 2 mm,


corresponding to 13 mm light on the tabletop.

8 Release screws 4.D to free the metal bracket 3.D of the longitudinal optical switch.

9 Position the metal bracket 3.D in the way that the optical switch is activated only when
the shutters are in this condition. The activation of the optical switch can be verified
looking at the FFD display. If the longitudinal optical switch is not activated, the second
digit of the display is 1, while if the switch is activated the digit is 0.

10 Lock screws 4.D and verify that the optical switch is properly calibrated.

11 By means of pushbuttons 8 and 9 drive the IRIS shutters up to a total closure, and go
back just a little.

12 Release screw 14.D to free the metal bracket 13.D of the IRIS switch.

13 Position the metal bracket 13.D in the way that the optical switch is activated only when
the shutters are in this condition.
The activation of the optical switch can be verified looking at the FFD display.
If the IRIS optical switch is not activated, the third digit of the display is 1, while if the
switch is activated the digit is 0.

14 Lock screw 14.D and verify that the optical switch is properly calibrated.

556 / 671
3 / 18

557 / 671
558 / 6714 / 18
16.3. SIMULATION LAMP REPLACEMENT

THIS PROCEDURE MUST BE CARRIED OUT EACH TIME THE COLLIMATOR LAMP MUST
BE ACCESSED FOR SERVICE OPERATION.

1 Loose screws 1 as shown in the following figure.

2 Remove the lamp cover 2 and spacer 3 as shown in the following figure.

BE CAREFULL! THE LAMP COVER COULD BE HOT!


REPLACE THE LAMP WITH ANOTHER ONE OF THE SAME TYPE.
DO NOT TOUCH THE NEW LAMP WITH YOUR HANDS.

3 Replace lamp 4 by pulling it down.

4. Align light field and x-ray field following the procedures indicated in paragraph 9.2

5. Mount back the covers following in the reverse order the instructions of this procedure.

559 / 671
5 / 18

560 / 671
16.4. COLLIMATOR CROSS REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT

1 Loose (not completely) screws 6.

2 Adjust the mask as required.

3 Tight screws 6.

561 / 671 6 / 18
16.5. COLLIMATOR INHERENT FILTRATION MODIFICATION

WARNING:
THE TUBE COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY MUST COMPLY WITH IEC601-1-3
REGULATION. THAT IS TO SAY THE HVL MUST RESPECT THE FOLLOWING
RULE:
HVL(100KV) > 2.7 mmAl/Eq.
IN CASE THE X-RAY TUBE INSTALLED ON THE SYSTEM IS NOT INCLUDED IN
THE LIST OF SECTION 2.7, THE INSTALLER MUST CHECK THE HVL VALUE.

The table collimator is supplied with 1.7 mm Al inherent filtration in order to comply IEC 601.1.3
regulation when installed on tube housing with inherent filtration equal to 1.1 mm Al.

When installed on tube housing with a lower inherent filtration it is possible to insert inside the
collimator an additional 0.5 mm Al/Eq filter, using the following procedure:

1. Remove the collimator covers as shown in the following figure.

2. Remove the collimator CPU with the keyboard assembly as shown in the
following figure.

3. Remove the fixation screws 1 and take out the filtration plate 2 by slipping it
out of the front side.

4. Correct the collimator filtration adding or removing the necessary number of


0.5 mm Al sheet. Additional sheets are delivered with the collimator. Lock the
sheets using screws 1.

5. Re-assemble the collimator carrying out in the reverse order the previous
instructions.

562 / 671
7 / 18

563 / 671
The installer examining the technical documentation of the x-ray tube (normally
adding the X-ray tube inherent filtration to the Housing inherent filtration) must
determine the value of the necessary additional filtration.
THE OPTIONAL BEAM HARDENING FILTERS MUST NOT BE USED TO MEET
THE NECESSARY VALUE OF INHERENT FILTRATION.

AFTER THAT INHERENT FILTRATION HAS BEEN ENCRESASED, STICK THE


ADDED FILTRATION LABEL TO THE COLLIMATOR REAR SIDE NEAR THE
COLLIMATOR ID PLATE. Also, please register data into the following table:
HVL(100KV) > 2.7 mmAl/Eq. IN CASE THE X-RAY TUBE INSTALLED ON THE
SYSTEM IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LIST OF SECTION 2.7 THE INSTALLER
MUST CHECK THE HVL VALUE.

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _ ---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

564 / 671
8 / 18
TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _ ---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _ ---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

TUBE HOUSING S/N INHERENT FILTRATION

_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ _ ---------------- _ mmAl/eq

COLLIMATOR S/N FILTRATION (mmAl/eq)

INHERENT : _________
_ ----------------------------- ----------------------------- _ ADDITIONAL: _________

566 / 671
9 / 18

567 / 671
16.6. COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION

16.6.1. COLLIMATOR DEFAULT PARAMETERS LOADING

The loading of the default parameters has the effect to corrupt the previous
calibration parameters stored into the collimator serial eeprom.
It is therefor necessary that the installer, once loaded the default calibration
parameter, check for the proper calibration of the collimator and correct it, if
necessary, as described in the following sections of this manual.

1. Remove the collimator front cover to access the CPU board from the bottom
side.

2. Set SW4 PIN 8 in ON position as shown in the following figure:

3. Switch the unit ON. The CPU will automatically load the default programming parameter
into the serial eeprom.
4. Switch the unit OFF. Set SW 4 PIN 8 in OFF position.
5. Mount back the collimator front cover. Check for the proper calibration of the collimator
and correct it, if necessary, as described in the following sections of this manual

568 / 671
10 / 18
16.7. COLLIMATOR LATERAL SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT

1 Enter the Unit service mode as indicated in section 8.3.1


2 Drive the X-RAY tube at the minimum FFD.
3 Press and hold button 7 until the longitudinal shutters are fully open.
Press and hold button 9 until the Iris is fully open.
4 Press button 1 on the collimator control panel repeatedly until the longitudinal display
shows number 01, to indicate that the calibration routine for the lateral shutters is
selected.
5 Use buttons 3 and 4 to set the lateral field size to 18 cm.

6 Press button 2 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.
7 Use buttons 3 and 4 to set the lateral field size to 43 cm.
8 Press button 5 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.
9 Drive the X-RAY tube at the maximum FFD. Skip this calibration step is the unit is
configured with fixed FFD.
10 Use buttons 3 and 4, to set the lateral field size to 18 cm.
11 Press button 10 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.
12 Use button 3 to open the lateral shutters completely.
13 Proceed to the next calibration procedure if required.
14 Return to the main menu 00 pressing button 1. Exit maintenance mode by switching OFF
the unit

The dimensions used in the calibration must be considered as default ones.


If necessary it is possible to modify this data. However, at the minimum SID the
dimensions must be increased or decreased of the same amount. No limitations
exist for the 18 cm dimension at the maximum SID

570 / 671
11 / 18

571 / 671
16.8. COLLIMATOR LONGITUDINAL SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT

1 Enter the Unit service mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2 Set the X-RAY tube at the minimum FFD.

3 Press and hold button 3 until the lateral shutters are fully open.
Press and hold button 9 until the Iris is fully open.

4 Press button 1 on the collimator control panel repeatedly until the longitudinal display
shows number 02, to indicate that the calibration routine for the longitudinal shutters is
selected.

5 Use buttons 6 and 7 to set the longitudinal field size to 18 cm.

6 Press button 2 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

7 Use buttons 6 and 7 to set the longitudinal field size to 43 cm.

8 Press button 5 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

9 Set the X-RAY tube at the maximum FFD. Skip this calibration step is the unit is
configured with fixed FFD.

10 Use buttons 6 and 7, to set the longitudinal field size to 18 cm.

11 Press button 10 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

12 Use button 7 to open the longitudinal shutters completely.

13 Proceed to the next calibration procedure if required.

14 Return to the main menu 00 pressing button 1. Exit maintenance mode by switching OFF
the unit

572 / 671
12 / 18
The dimensions used in the calibration must be considered as default ones.
If necessary it is possible to modify this data. However, at the minimum SID the
dimensions must be increased or decreased of the same amount. No limitations
exist for the 18 cm dimension at the maximum SID

574 / 671
13 / 18

575 / 671
16.8.1. COLLIMATOR IRIS SHUTTERS ADJUSTMENT

1 Enter the Unit service mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2 Set the X-RAY tube at the minimum FFD.

3 Press and hold button 3 until the Transverse shutters are fully open.
Press and hold button 7 until the longitudinal shutters are fully open.

4 Press button 1 on the collimator control panel repeatedly until the longitudinal display
shows number 03, to indicate that the calibration routine for the iris is selected.

5 Use buttons 8 and 9 to set the iris to a diameter of 18 cm.

6 Press button 2 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The iris will
close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

7 Use buttons 8 and 9 to set the iris to a diameter of 43 cm.

8 Press button 5 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

9 Set the X-RAY tube at the maximum FFD. Skip this calibration step is the unit is
configured with fixed FFD.

10 Use buttons 8 and 9 to set iris to a diameter of 18 cm.

11 Press button 10 to record this position in the eeprom of the collimator CPU. The shutters
will close and re-open to the set dimension. Check that the opening is correct.

12 Use button 9 to open the iris completely.

13 Proceed to the next calibration procedure if required.

14 Return to the main menu 00 pressing button 1. Exit maintenance mode by switching OFF
the unit

576 / 671
14 / 18
The dimensions used in the calibration must be considered as default ones.
If necessary it is possible to modify this data. However, at the minimum SID the
dimensions must be increased or decreased of the same amount. No limitations
exist for the 18 cm dimension at the maximum SID

578 / 671
15 / 18

579 / 671
16.8.2. COLLIMATOR SHUTTERS MAXIMUM OPENING SETTING

This procedure is for entering software limits for the maximum opening of the collimator
shutters.

1 Enter the unit service mode as indicted in section 8.3.1

2 Press button 1 on the collimator control panel repeatedly until the longitudinal display
shows number 04, to indicate that the maximum opening calibration routine is selected.

3 Use buttons 3, 7 and 9, to completely open all collimator shutters.

4 Press button 10; the transverse shutters will close and then return to the previous position.

5 Press button 5; the longitudinal shutters will close and then return to the previous position.

6 Press button 2; the iris will close and then return to the previous position.

7 Proceed to the next calibration procedure if required.

8 Return to the main menu 00 pressing button 1 and exit maintenance mode by switching
OFF the unit.

16580
/ 18/ 671
16.8.3. I.I. FIELDS DIMENSION COMPENSATION

Using this calibration routine it is possible, after the collimator full calibration, to adapt the
theoretical I.I. fields size to the real useful fields of the installed I.I.

Even if it is necessary to modify the size of the I.I. fields, this procedure must be
carried out in order to record the standard calibration values into the CPU eeprom.

1 Enter the unit service mode as indicted in section 8.3.1.


2 Press button 1 on the collimator control panel repeatedly until the longitudinal display
shows number 06, to indicate that the I.I. field size compensation routine is selected.
3 Press button 3. The collimator will set the iris to the Nominal full size of the I.I.
4 Using buttons 8 and 9 set the exposure area to the desired size:
a Each time button 8 is pressed, the diameter will be reduced by 1 mm.
b Each time button 9 is pressed, the diameter will be increased by 1 mm.
c The exposure field size can never exceed the nominal field size.
5 Press button 10 to store this value to the CPU eeprom.
6 Press button 4. The collimator will set the iris to the Nominal size of MAG1.
7 Using buttons 8 and 9 set the exposure area to the desired size. Items a, b, and c of step
4 apply.
8 Press button 10 to store this value to the CPU eeprom.
9 Press button 7. The collimator will set the iris to the Nominal size of MAG2.
10 Using buttons 8 and 9 set the exposure area to the desired size. Items a, b, and c of step
4 apply.
11 Press button 10 to store this value to the CPU eeprom.
12 Press button 6. The collimator will set the iris to the Nominal size of MAG3.
13 Using buttons 8 and 9 set the exposure area to the desired size. Items a, b, and c of step
4 apply.
14 Press button 10 to store this value to the CPU eeprom.
15 Return to the main menu 00 pressing button 1 and exit maintenance by switching OFF the
unit.

Each time that the operator presses buttons 3, 4, 6, or 7 the nominal I.I. field
diameter will be
shown. If the operator does not store new calibration data pressing button 10, the
old calibration data will remain valid.

581 / 671
17 / 18

582 / 671
18 / 18 583 / 671
17. ERROR MESSAGES
17.1. TABLE - ERROR SITUATION MANAGEMENT

The remote tilting system is equipped with self-diagnostic software that monitors the status of the
electronics circuits. The behaviour of the diagnostic module depends on the operative status of the
unit, and in particular:
UNIT START UP PHASE
At the unit start-up, an automatic self test routine is executed in order to check the main electronic
circuits and the connected devices. In particular the touch screen console executes the generator
initialization and establishes the serial link communication.

If the touch screen console does not detect any error condition, on the color TFT display the following

584 / 671
figure will appear

1 / 35

585 / 671
As soon as the user touches the GO button the system is ready to start the normal operation; the
table control desk CPU start executing the keyboard test to verify that the joysticks and the buttons
that control the major unit movements are not faulty.

In case an error condition is detected the following error message will appear:

The unit is immediately set of out of service and the user can only try to clear the error by switching
the unit OFF, wait for about 20 seconds and switch it ON. In case the error is not cleared he must
contact the Service team. In case the errors queue list contains more than 1 error, as soon as the
operator clears the error
touching icon on the touch screen display appears the errors queue menu as shown in

the following figure:

586 / 671
2 / 35

587 / 671
Using the UP/DOWN arrows the operator can scroll the errors list.

Touching icon the user can abandon the error display menu.
If the keyboard test is ended without error detection, the control desk CPU executes an
initialization of all the slaves CPU of the system. In case a slave CPU has not completed the start up
procedure the following messages will appear on the LCD display:

Touching icon the user can cancel the current error to force the display of the next one if
any.

Using the UP/DOWN arrows the operator can scroll the errors list.

Touching icon the user can abandon the error display menu.
The user can try to clear the error by switching the unit OFF, wait for about 20 seconds
and switch it ON. In case the error is not cleared he must contact the Service team.

588 / 671
3 / 35
In case of assistance request is important that the operator minutely describes to the
Service team the error messages displayed and the actual status of the unit.
That will allow the service team to reduce at the minimum the Service time.

17.2. UNIT NORMAL OPERATIVE PHASE

The Unit control firmware includes a self-diagnostic module that continuously monitors the conditions
of the electronics circuits. In case a fault condition is detected, a specific Error message appears on
touch screen display as detailed in the following figure:

The circuit that has generated the error is set out of order.

The user can try to clear the error touching icon


The system will try to recover the error condition. In the negative the user must switch
the system OFF and contact the Service team.

The user can also try to clear the error by switching the unit OFF, wait for about 20 seconds and
switch it ON. In case the error is not cleared he must contact the Service team.
In case the errors queue list contains more than 1 error, as soon as the operator clears the error

touching icon on the touch screen display appears the errors queue menu as shown in
the following figure

590 / 671
4 / 35

591 / 671
Using the UP/DOWN arrows the operator can scroll the errors list.

Touching icon the user can resume normal operation without deleting the errors

that remain stored in the CPU memory.

In case of assistance request is important that the operator minutely describes to the
Service team the error messages displayed and the actual status of the unit. That
will allow the service team to reduce at the minimum the Service time.

The unit must not be used in case of fault of the proper circuits or of fault of the
system in which it is a part. Identically the unit must not be used in case any alarm
device of the whole system is faulty.

592 / 671
5 / 35
17.3. TABLE - ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
CONSOLE CPU
1000 Consolle cpu eeprom crc error
1001 Configuration data section crc error
1011 joistick channel 1 stucked to + 5v error
1012 joistick channel 2 stucked to + 5v error
1013 joistick channel 3 stucked to + 5v error
1014 joistick channel 4 stucked to + 5v error
1015 joistick channel 1 stucked to + 0v error
1016 joistick channel 2 stucked to + 0v error
1017 joistick channel 3 stucked to + 0v error
1018 joistick channel 4 stucked to + 0v error
1030 consolle CPU can bus off
1031 can communication broken with three phase cpu
1032 can communication broken with collim cpu
1033 can communication broken with spot film device cpu
1034 can communication broken with remote keyboard cpu

1040 Not used in this software version


1041 push button error found at start-up on consolle
1042 Not used in this software version
1043 joystick error at start-up on consolle
1044 three phase cpu not responding
1045 software version on three phase not syncronized error
1046 collim cpu not responding
1047 software version on collim not syncronized error
1048 spot film device cpu not responding
1049 software version on spot film device not syncronized error
1050 version not syncronized error
1051 software version on remote keyboard not syncronized error
SPOT FILM DEVICE CPU
2000 reset of the spot film device cpu error
2001 keyboard button pressed at start-up on spot film device error
2002 spot film device cpu WDT error
2003 spot film device cpu eeprom crc error
TRIPHASE
3000 elevation driver not correctly inizialized
3001 longitudinal column driver not correcty inizialized
3002 spot film device driver not correcty inizialized
3003 crc potentiometer data section error
3004 crc digital potentiometer data section error
3005 crc encoder data section error
3006 wrong driver command : movement aborted
3007 wrong driver command : movement unknown
3008 nodeguarding column driver timeout
3009 nodeguarding elevation driver timeout
3010 nodeguarding spot film device driver timeout
3011 i2-c bus error
3012 ciclic can-message timeout
3013 longitudinal column driver programmation error

594 / 671
6 / 35

595 / 671
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
3014 longitudinal spot film device driver programmation error
3015 longitudinal elevation driver programmation error
3016 three phase cpu reset error
3017 warning : default value for encoder longitudinal column
3018 warning : default value for encoder spot film device
3019 warning : default value for encoder elevation
3020 power on for tilting driver error
3021 tilting driver fault
3022 tilting driver error
3023 tilting driver busy error
3024 elevation microswitch error
3025 min elevation height error
3026 max elevation height error
3027 tilting brake error
3028 elevation end of travel microswitch setting error
3029 driver axis distance too big error
3030 driver axis off-line warning
3031 all drivers are off-line warning
3032 power on table top driver error
3033 power on focal distance driver error
3034 power on column - spot film device driver error
3035 column firmware driver not syncronized
3036 sfd firmware driver not syncronized
3037 elevation firmware driver not syncronized
3040 X-ray on timeout error
3041 grid not ready timeout error
3042 cassette not ready timeout error
3043 generator preparation phase error
3044 motions not blocked error
3045 generator not ready timeout error
3046 spot film device busy timeout error
3047 X-ray off timeout error
3048 collimator busy timeout error
3049 axis alignment timeout error
3050 grid stop timeout error
3051 tomo not ready timeout error
3052 hiris not ready timeout error
3060 potentiometer - encoder driver longitudinal column mismatch
3061 potentiometer - encoder driver elevation mismatch
3062 potentiometer - encoder driver spot film device mismatch
3070 external fluoro active at start-up error
3071 external preparation active at start-up error
3072 external exposure active at start-up error
COLLIMATOR
4000 x axis shutter error
4001 y axis shutter error
4002 iris axis shutter error
4003 crc collim eeprom data section error
4004 reset cpu collim error
4005 collim cpu wdt error
4006 keyboard button pressed at start-up on collim cpu error
COLUMN DRIVER
3100 column driver : generic error

596 / 671
3101 column driver : no BTB/RTO

7 / 35

597 / 671
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
3102 column driver : earth short
3103 column driver : no mains/line BTB
3104 column driver : overvoltage in DC bus
3105 column driver : undervoltage in DC bus
3106 column driver : supply line phase missing
3107 column driver : ambient temperature too high
3108 column driver : heat sink temperature too high
3109 column driver : motor temperature too high
3110 column driver : fault in +/- 15 volt
3111 column driver : fault in A/D converter
3112 column driver : fault in output stage
3113 column driver : ballast
3114 column driver : operation error for AS option
3115 column driver : serial EEPROM
3116 column driver : flash EEPROM
3117 column driver : watchdog
3118 column driver : BCC error table
3119 column driver : BCC error macro
3120 column driver : BCC error eeprom
3121 column driver : FPGA error
3122 column driver : Fault - error
3123 column driver : User software BCC
3124 column driver : Faulty user software
3125 column driver : Parameter error
3126 column driver : Breaking error
3127 column driver : Commutation error
3128 column driver : Could not enable SERVO
3129 column driver : Command only in disabled status
3130 column driver : Feedback device error
3131 column driver : Handling error
3132 column driver : Response monitoring activated
3133 column driver : CAN bus off
3134 column driver : Status servo not in oeration enabled
3135 column driver : wrong mode setting
3136 column driver : torque fault
3137 column driver : overspeed
3138 column driver : Lag error
3139 column driver : Invalid motion task
3140 column driver : external trajectory error
3141 column driver : serious exception error
3142 column driver : error in PDO elements
3143 column driver : operating mode
3144 column driver : slot error
3145 column driver : warning display as error
3146 column driver : homing error
3147 column driver : sercos error
3148 column driver : sercos
3149 column driver : unknown error
3150 column driver : error reset or no error
3151 column driver : motor phase error
3152 column driver : i2t threshold exceeded
3153 column driver : full regen power reached
3154 column driver : lag-following error

598 / 671
3155 column driver : response monitoring activated

8 / 35

599 / 671
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
3156 column driver : power supply phase missing
3157 column driver : software limit 1 activated
3158 column driver : software limit 2 activated
3159 column driver : faulty motion task started
3160 column driver : no reference point set
3161 column driver : pstop activated
3162 column driver : nstop activated
3163 column driver : motor default value loaded
3164 column driver : expansion board not functioning
3165 column driver : motor phase
3166 column driver : erroneous vct entry selected
SPOT FILM DEVICE
3200 spot film device driver : generic error
3201 spot film device driver : no BTB/RTO
3202 spot film device driver : earth short
3203 spot film device driver : no mains/line BTB
3204 spot film device driver : over voltage in DC bus
3205 spot film device driver : under voltage in DC bus
3206 spot film device driver : supply line phase missing
3207 spot film device driver : ambient temperature too high
3208 spot film device driver : heat sink temperature too high
3209 spot film device driver : motor temperature too high
3210 spot film device driver :fault in +/- 15 volt
3211 spot film device driver: fault in A/D converter
3212 spot film device driver : fault in output stage
3213 spot film device driver : ballast
3214 spot film device driver : operation error for AS option
3215 spot film device driver : serial EEPROM
3216 spot film device driver: flash EEPROM
3217 spot film device driver : watchdog
3218 spot film device driver: BCC error table
3219 spot film device driver : BCC error macro
3220 spot film device driver : BCC error eeprom
3221 spot film device driver : FPGA error
3222 spot film device driver : Fault - error
3223 spot film device driver : User software BCC
3224 spot film device driver : Faulty user software
3225 spot film device driver : Parameter error
3226 spot film device driver : Breaking error
3227 spot film device driver : Commutation error
3228 spot film device driver : Could not enable SERVO
3229 spot film device driver : Command only in disabled status
3230 spot film device driver : Feedback device error
3231 spot film device driver : Handling error
3232 spot film device driver : Response monitoring activated
3233 spot film device driver : CAN bus off
3234 spot film device driver : Status servo not in oeration enabled
3235 spot film device driver : wrong mode setting
3236 spot film device driver : torque fault
3237 spot film device driver : overspeed
3238 spot film device driver : Lag error
3239 spot film device driver : Invalid motion task
3240 spot film device driver : external trajectory error

600 / 671
3241 spot film device driver : serious exception error

9 / 35

601 / 671
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
3242 spot film device driver : error in PDO elements
3243 spot film device driver : operating mode
3244 spot film device driver : slot error
3245 spot film device driver : warning display as error
3246 spot film device driver : homing error
3247 spot film device driver : sercos error
3248 spot film device driver : sercos
3249 spot film device driver : unknown error
3250 spot film device driver : error reset or no error
3251 spot film device driver : motor phase error
3252 spot film device driver : i2t threshold exceeded
3253 spot film device driver : full regen power reached
3254 spot film device driver : lag-following error
3255 spot film device driver : response monitoring activated
3256 spot film device driver : power supply phase missing
3257 spot film device driver : software limit 1 activated
3258 spot film device driver : software limit 2 activated
3259 spot film device driver : faulty motion task started
3260 spot film device driver : no reference point set
3261 spot film device driver : pstop activated
3262 spot film device driver : nstop activated
3263 spot film device driver : motor default value loaded
3264 spot film device driver : expansion board not functioning
3265 spot film device driver : motor phase
3266 spot film device driver : erroneous vct entry selected
ELEVATION DRIVER
3300 elevation driver : generic error
3301 elevation driver : no BTB/RTO
3302 elevation driver : earth short
3303 elevation driver : no mains/line BTB
3304 elevation driver : over voltage in DC bus
3305 elevation driver : under voltage in DC bus
3306 elevation driver : supply line phase missing
3307 elevation driver : ambient temperature too high
3308 elevation driver : heat sink temperature too high
3309 elevation driver : motor temperature too high
3310 elevation driver : fault in +/- 15 volt
3311 elevation driver : fault in A/D converter
3312 elevation driver : fault in output stage
3313 elevation driver : ballast
3314 elevation driver : operation error for AS option
3315 elevation driver : serial EEPROM
3316 elevation driver : flash EEPROM
3317 elevation driver : watchdog
3318 elevation driver : BCC error table
3319 elevation driver : BCC error macro
3320 elevation driver : BCC error eeprom
3321 elevation driver : FPGA error
3322 elevation driver : Fault - error
3322 elevation driver : User software BCC
3324 elevation driver : Faulty user software
3325 elevation driver : Parameter error
3326 elevation driver : Breaking error

602 / 671
10 / 35

603 / 671
ERROR NUMBER MEANING
3327 elevation driver : Commutation error
3328 elevation driver : Could not enable SERVO
3329 elevation driver : Command only in disabled status
3330 elevation driver : Feedback device error
3331 elevation driver : Handling error
3332 elevation driver : Response monitoring activated
3333 elevation driver : CAN bus off
3334 elevation driver : Status servo not in oeration enabled
3335 elevation driver : wrong mode setting
3336 elevation driver : torque fault
3337 elevation driver : overspeed
3338 elevation driver : Lag error
3339 elevation driver : Invalid motion task
3340 elevation driver : external trajectory error
3341 elevation driver : serious exception error
3342 elevation driver : error in PDO elements
3343 elevation driver : operating mode
3344 elevation driver : slot error
3345 elevation driver : warning display as error
3346 elevation driver : homing error
3347 elevation driver : sercos error
3348 elevation driver : sercos
3349 elevation driver : unknown error
3350 elevation driver : error reset or no error
3351 elevation driver : motor phase error
3352 elevation driver : i2t threshold exceeded
3353 elevation driver : full regen power reached
3354 elevation driver : lag-following error
3355 elevation driver : response monitoring activated
3356 elevation driver : power supply phase missing
3357 elevation driver : software limit 1 activated
3358 elevation driver : software limit 2 activated
3359 elevation driver : faulty motion task started
3360 elevation driver : no reference point set
3361 elevation driver : pstop activated
3362 elevation driver : nstop activated
3363 elevation driver : motor default value loaded
3364 elevation driver : expansion board not functioning
3365 elevation driver : motor phase
3366 elevation driver : erroneus vct entry selected

604 / 671
11 / 35
17.4. GENERATOR – ERROR SITUATION MANAGEMENT

The generator is equipped with self-diagnostic software that continuously monitors the conditions of
the electronics circuits and grants a safe operation of the x-ray tube.
In case a fault condition is detected, a specific Error message appears on touch screen display as
detailed in the following figure:

Warning messages are cleared automatically after they have been displayed for several seconds.

The unit is immediately set of out of service and the error code is stored in the control desk non-
volatile memory where can be retrieved by the service team.

The user can try to clear the error touching icon


The system will try to recover the error condition. In the negative the user must switch the
system OFF and contact the Service team.

The user can also try to clear the error by switching the unit OFF, wait for about 20 seconds and
switch it ON. In case the error is not cleared he must contact the Service team.

In case the errors queue list contains more than 1 error, as soon as the operator clears the error

606 / 671
12 / 35

607 / 671
touching icon on the touch screen display appears the errors queue menu

as shown in the following figure.

0156

Using the UP/DOWN arrows the operator can scroll the errors list.

Touching icon the user can resume normal operation without deleting the errors

that remain stored in the CPU memory.

In case of assistance request is important that the operator minutely describes to the
Service team the error messages displayed and the actual status of the unit.
That will allow the service team to reduce at the minimum the Service time.

The unit must not be used in case of fault of the proper circuits or of fault of the system in
which it is a part. Identically the unit must not be used in case any alarm device of the
whole system is faulty.

608 / 671
13 / 35
17.5. CASTOR GENERATORS - ERROR MESSAGES
These messages indicate that an error has occurred.
ERROR MESSAGE PROBLEM

128 NOT EXISTANT Anatomical program not existing


129 TIME-OUT PREP Timeout preparation
130 TOMO PREP. SAF Tomo prep.
131 ? HEAT RADIO ? Exposure heating error
132 AEC NOT READY IMA input not active
133 ANODE SAFETY IAR input not active
134 PWS SAFETY IPW input not active
135 DIG. FIL. SAF.", ICF input not active
136 GENERAL SAFETY Not used
137 INVERTER SAF IUB input not active
138 HT-CHANGE OVER Tube Selection error
139 DOOR SAFETY Room door not closed
140 LOW kV SAFETY IRM error in exposure and fluoro mode
141 AEC DOSE SAF Dose expomat error
142 AEC REL. SAF IRA and IPR input opens in expomat
143 AEC TIME-OUT Timeout expomat
144 TOMO REL. SAF. IRA and IPR input opens in tomo
145 TOMO TIME-OUT Timeout tomography
146 MAX TOMO SAF kV at maximum value in tomo
147 MIN TOMO SAF kV at minimum value in tomo
148 mA RADIO SAF. Exposure mA error
149 kV RADIO SAF. Exposure kV error
150 RAY OFF SAFETY Exposure abort error
151 THERMAL OVERLD Thermal overload in fluoro
152 HEAT FLUORO? Fluoro heating error
153 kV FLUORO SAF Fluoro kV error
154 mA FLUORO SAF Fluoro mA error
155 FLUORO TIMEOUT Fluoro time limit
156 TU-1 THERM-SAF Thermal safety tube #1
157 TU-2 THERM-SAF Thermal safety tube #2
158 TU-3 THERM-SAF Thermal safety tube #3
159 NO ANALOG Error on analog inputs
160 RDY X-RAY SAF Ready to expose error
161 mAs SAFETY mAs safety error
162 TUBE OVERLOAD Tube overload in exposure sequence
163 NO kV FEEDBACK kV feedback error
164 kV UNBALANCED kV balancing error
165 HIGH PRIM.CUR Primary circuit current safety
166 HIGH SEC.CUR Secondary circuit current safety
167 SAF. MAX kV kV value > 150 kV
168 SAF. INVERTER Inverter fault
169 CALC. TARAT. Calibration data error
Reserved – Ok exposure during calibration
170 RAY TARAT.
Exposure switch pressed during tube switch or at power
171 RAY REQUEST
on.
172 MAX DOSE Expomat dose too high
173 SAF.SUPERVISOR Supervisor board safety
174 NO CAN BUS ACT Can bus communication not active
175 ALARM 176 Reserved – Filter error

610 / 671
14 / 35

611 / 671
17.6. DEIMOS GENERATOR - OPERATOR AND LIMIT MESSAGES
17.6.1. OPERATOR MESSAGES

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
INITIALIZATION Displayed during power up sequence.
SPINNING ROTOR Displayed when prep state is active.
X-RAY READY Displayed when generator is ready to expose
X-RAY ON Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure.
DAP NOT READY The optional DAP is in its “warm up” state, and not ready to make
DAP measurements.

17.6.2. LIMIT MESSAGES

These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.

MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


AEC DENSITY LIM Requested density not programmed. Select another density or
request those steps be
programmed. Consult
your service
representative for this.
ANODE HEAT WARN Anode has exceeded programmed Wait for anode to cool.
warning level.
CAL LIMIT Requested parameter not calibrated. Consult your service
representative.
DAP ACCUM WARN The accumulated DAP value has Reset the DAP.
reached the programmed DAP limit.
DAP RATE WARN The current DAP rate exceeds the Reduce the dose.
programmed DAP rate limit.
FL TIMER WARN Fluoro interval timer ε 5.0 mins. Reset fluoro timer.
MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
GEN DUTY WARNING The X-Ray generator has reached Re-evaluate technique
its duty warning limit. factors. Allow generator
to cool if possible. If
exposures are continued,
serious generator
damage may result due
to overheating.
GEN KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as None.
generator kV limit has been reached.
GEN MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as None.
generator mA limit has been
reached.
GEN MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as None.
generator mAs limit has been
reached.
GEN MS LIMIT Requested ms not allowed as None.
generator ms limit has been
reached.
GEN KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as None.
generator kW limit has been
reached.
612 / 671
15 / 35

613 / 671
MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
GEN. PPS LIMIT PPS limit has been reached. None.
INVALID PARAM Generator detected invalid Select valid parameter.
parameter within received message,
message ignored.
LABEL JAMMED The labels are jammed. Clear the paper jam.
OUT OF LABELS The printer is out of labels. Load more labels.
PLATEN OPEN The paper platen is not positioned Check the platen
properly. position.
PRINTER COMM ERROR The printer has reported a Try printing again.
communication error.
PRINTER ERROR The printer self-diagnostics have Refer to the printer
reported a printer problem. manual.
PRINTER OFF-LINE The printer is off-line. Put the printer on-line.
TUBE KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as None.
tube kW limit has been reached.
TUBE KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as tube kV None.
limit has been reached.
TUBE MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as tube None.
mA limit has been reached.
TUBE MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as tube None.
mAs limit has been reached.

614 / 671
16 / 35

615 / 671
17.7. DEIMOS GENERATOR - ERROR MESSAGES

These messages indicate that an error has occurred.

ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION


E001 GEN EPROM ERR Consult your service
representative.
E003 GEN NVRAM ERR Consult your service
representative.
E004 GEN RTC ERROR Generator CPU real Reset time and date.
time clock is not
functioning. Consult your service
representative.
E005 PS CONTACT ERR Consult your service
representative.
E006 ROTOR FAULT Power unit off and retry
rotor start.
Consult your service
representative.
E007 FILAMENT FAULT Consult your service
representative.
E008 MA FAULT Consult your service
representative.
E009 PS NOT READY Power supply is not Retry exposure.
ready to make an
exposure. Consult your service
representative.
E011 HIGH MA FAULT Consult your service
representative.
E012 LOW MA FAULT Consult your service
representative.
E013 MANUAL TERMIN Operator released Re-take exposure if
exposure switch during necessary.
exposure.
Consult your service
representative.
E014 AEC BUT ERROR AEC exposure Check exposure
exceeded allowed back technique settings.
up time.
Consult your service
representative.
E015 AEC BU MAS ERR AEC exposure Check exposure
exceeded allowed back technique settings.
up mAs.
Consult your service
representative.
E016 TOMO BUT ERROR Tomo exposure 1. Check exposure
exceeded back up time. technique settings.
2. Increase tomo back up
time if necessary.
E017 NOT CALIBRATED Consult your service
representative.
E018 PREP TIMEOUT Generator has been in Reduce length of time in

616 / 671
17 / 35
ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
prep state too long. prep state.
E019 ANODE HEAT LIMIT Selected parameters Reduce parameters or
will cause X-Ray tube wait for tube to cool.
to exceed its
programmed anode
heat limit.
E020 THERMAL INT #1 X-Ray tube # 1 too hot Wait for X-Ray tube # 1 to
and its thermal switch cool.
has opened.
E021 THERMAL INT #2 X-Ray tube # 2 too hot Wait for X-Ray tube # 2 to
and its thermal switch cool.
has opened.
E022 DOOR INTERLOCK Door is open. Close door.
E023 COLLIMATOR ERR Collimator is not ready. Check collimator.
E024 CASSETTE ERROR Cassette is not ready. Check cassette.
E025 II SAFETY INT II safety is not ready. Check II safety.
E026 SPARE INT Spare input is not Consult your service
ready. representative.
E028 PREP SW CLOSED Consult your service
representative.
E029 X-RAY SW CLOSED Consult your service
representative.
E030 FLUORO SW Consult your service
CLOSED representative.
E031 REMOTE COMM Communication error Turn power off and then
ERR detected with remote on to Reset Generator.
fluoro control unit. Consult your service
representative.
E032 CONSOLE COMM Generator has detected Turn power off and then
ERR error in communication on to reset generator.
to console. Consult your service
representative.
E033 GEN BATTERY LOW Consult your service
representative.
E034 +12VDC ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E035 -12VDC ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E036 +15VDC ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E037 -15VDC ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E038 CAL DATA ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E039 AEC DATA ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E040 FLUORO DATA Consult your service
ERROR representative.
E041 REC DATA ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E042 TUBE DATA ERR Consult your service
representative..

618 / 671
E043 KV ERROR Switch OFF generator.
Prevent further use of
generator, then. consult
18 / 35

619 / 671
ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
your service
representative.
E044 COMM ERROR Received Reset error.
communication
message not valid and
ignored.
E045 NOT SUPPORTED Received message Reset error.
valid, but not supported
by this system.
E046 MODE INHIBITED Received message Reset error.
valid, but not allowed
during present state.
E047 FL TIMER LIMIT Fluoro Timer has Reset Fluoro timer.
exceeded time limit.
E048 FOCUS MISMATCH Consult your service
representative.
E049 NOT ENABLED Requested function has Consult your service
not been programmed to representative.
be enabled.
E050 GEN DATA ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E051 AEC DEVICE ERR Generator has detected Check that X-Ray tube
no feedback signal from is pointing at correct
AEC device. AEC device.
Consult your service
representative.
E052 HIGH SF CURRENT Consult your service
representative.
E053 HIGH LF CURRENT Consult your service
representative.
E054 AEC OUT OF Consult your service
RANGE representative.
E055 NO FIELDS ACTIVE AEC enabled but no Select AEC field(s).
fields are selected.
E056 NO TUBE Consult your service
SELECTED representative.
E057 AEC STOP ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E058 CONSOLE BUT ERR Consult your service
representative.
E059 HOUSE HEAT LIMIT X-Ray tube housing Wait for tube to cool.
has exceeded limit.
E060 EXP KV HIGH Consult your service
representative.
E061 EXP KV LOW Consult your service
representative.
E062 EXP_ SW ERROR Consult your service
representative.
E063 FACTORY Consult your service
DEFAULTS representative.
E066 NO SYNC PULSE Consult your service
representative.
E070 SOFTWARE KEY Consult your service
ERR representative.

620 / 671
19 / 35
ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
E071 DAP OVERFLOW The accumulated DAP Reset the DAP.
value exceeds the
display limit.
E072 DAP DEVICE The DAP device is not Consult your service
ERROR functional. representative.
E073 DAP DATA ERROR Consult service
representative.

622 / 671
20 / 35

623 / 671
17.8. DEIMOS GENERATOR EXPOSURE TABLES

The following Table 1 shows mAs values resulting from preselected mA and ms values (3 point
operation). This table also shows the range and interrelation of these loading factors.

For example, if in AEC operation it is known that the preset backup mAs limit is 50 mAs and 100 mA
is chosen for that technique, then the maximum length of exposure possible (at which time the backup
mAs limit is reached) is 500 ms.

In the above example, read down the 100 mA column to the 50 mAs value.
Then read across to the left side of the page to the 500 ms value, this will be the maximum time
allowed for the stated conditions.

IEC 60601-2-7 requires that this information be provided in a form suitable to be displayed at a
prominent location on or near the control console of the generator.

624 / 671
21 / 35
626 / 671
TECHNIQUE SELECTION
(3 Point Selection: mA/TIME & mAs per IEC)

Time mA Selected

(ms) 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

1.0

1.2 .5

1.6 .5 .63

2 .5 .63 .8

2.5 .5 .63 .8 1.0

3.2 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25

4 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6

5 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0

6.3 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5

8 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2

10 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0

12.5 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

16 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3

627 / 671
23 / 35

628 / 671
20 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0

25 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10

32 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5

40 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16

50 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20

63 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25

80 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32

100 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40

125 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50

160 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

200 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80

250 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

320 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

400 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160

500 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

Table 1: mAs values vs. mA & time selected


Table 1 continued on next page

629 / 671
24 / 35
Time mA Selected

(ms) 500 630 800 1000

1.0 .5 .63 .8 1.0

1.2 .63 .8 1.0 1.2

1.6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.6

2 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0

2.5 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5

3.2 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2

4 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0

5 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

6.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3

8 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0

10 5.0 6.3 8.0 10

12.5 6.3 8.0 10 12.5

16 8.0 10 12.5 16

20 10 12.5 16 20

630 / 671
25 / 35

631 / 671
25 12.5 16 20 25

32 16 20 25 32

40 20 25 32 40

50 25 32 40 50

63 32 40 50 63

80 40 50 63 80

100 50 63 80 100

125 63 80 100 125

160 80 100 125 160

200 100 125 160 200

250 125 160 200 250

320 160 200 250 320

400 200 250 320 400

500 250 320 400 500

Table 1 (Cont): mAs values vs. mA & time selected

Table 1 continued on next page

632 / 671
26 / 35
Time mA Selected

(ms) 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

630 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

800 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320

1000 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

1250 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500

1600 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630

2000 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800

2500 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

3200 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

4000 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

5000 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

6300 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

633 / 671
27 / 35

634 / 671
Time mA Selected

(ms) 500 630 800 1000

630 320 400 500 630


800 400 500 630 800
1000 500 630 800 1000
1250 630 800 1000
1600 800 1000
2000 1000
2500
3200
4000
5000
6300
Table 1 (Cont): mAs values vs. mA & time selected
Table 1 continued on next page
Note: 65 kW Generators Maximum mA = 800

635 / 671
80 kW Generators Maximum mA = 1000
28 / 35

Nota: 1) mA/TIME values are tube rating dependent. For certain tubes, some mA/TIME selections are not available at higher kV
selections.

2) The maximum power output of this family of generators is 32 kW, 40 kW, 50 kW, 65 kW, 80 kW, or 100 kW respectively.
The generator software does not allow a kV and mA combination to be selected that exceeds these maximum values.

636 / 671
TECHNIQUE SELECTION
(3 Point Selection: mA/TIME & mAs per IEC)

Time mA Selected

(ms) 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

1.0

1.2 .5

1.6 .5 .63

2 .5 .63 .8

2.5 .5 .63 .8 1.0

3.2 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25

4 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6

5 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0

6.3 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5

8 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2

10 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0

12.5 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

16 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3

637 / 671
29 / 35

638 / 671
20 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0
25 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10

32 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5
40 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16
50 .5 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20

63 .63 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25
80 .8 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32

100 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40
125 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50
160 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

200 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80


250 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

320 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125


400 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
500 5.0 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

Table 1: mAs values vs. mA & time selected

639 / 671
30 / 35
Time mA Selected

(ms) 500 630 800 1000

1.0 .5 .63 .8 1.0

1.2 .63 .8 1.0 1.2

1.6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.6

2 1.0 1.25 1.6 2.0

2.5 1.25 1.6 2.0 2.5

3.2 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.2

4 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.0

5 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0

6.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3

8 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0

10 5.0 6.3 8.0 10

12.5 6.3 8.0 10 12.5

16 8.0 10 12.5 16

20 10 12.5 16 20

640 / 671
31 / 35

641 / 671
25 12.5 16 20 25

32 16 20 25 32

40 20 25 32 40

50 25 32 40 50

63 32 40 50 63

80 40 50 63 80

100 50 63 80 100

125 63 80 100 125

160 80 100 125 160

200 100 125 160 200

250 125 160 200 250

320 160 200 250 320

400 200 250 320 400

500 250 320 400 500

642 / 671
32 / 35

643 / 671
mA Selected
Time

(ms) 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

630 6.3 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

800 8.0 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320

1000 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400

1250 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500

1600 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630

2000 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800

2500 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

3200 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

4000 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

5000 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

6300 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000

644 / 671
33 / 35

645 / 671
Time mA Selected

(ms) 500 630 800 1000

630 320 400 500 630

800 400 500 630 800

1000 500 630 800 1000

1250 630 800 1000

1600 800 1000

2000 1000

2500

3200

4000

5000

6300

Table 1 (Cont): mAs values vs. mA & time selected

Note: 65 kW Generators Maximum mA = 800


80 kW Generators Maximum mA = 1000

Note: 1) mA/TIME values are tube rating dependent. For certain tubes, some mA/TIME selections are not available at higher
kV selections.

2) The maximum power output of this family of generators is 32 kW, 40 kW, 50 kW, 65 kW, 80 kW, or 100 kW. respectively.
The generator software does not allow a kV and mA combination to be selected that exceeds these maximum values.

646 / 671
34 / 35
647 / 671
35 / 35
18. UNIT INTERCOM CIRCUIT

18.1. INTERCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The Intercom system is basically composed of two similar stages, integrated on the control desk
CPU 006050.171 and on the tube stand control 006050.167 boards

The speakers and microphones at the operator and patient side are directly connected at these
boards. To achieve the proper functionality of the intercom system, also the cable code
002500.430 must be present.

The intercom circuit is supplied by the 30Vdc bus of the unit trough switching step down
converters to ± 12V.
The voice transfer from the two stages of the intercom circuit is achieved using differential analog
line drivers and receivers.

The intercom system is controlled by means of 2 bottons that are located at the left-bottom side
of the unit keyboard. Such buttons are merged into the keys matrix and scanned by the console
CPU.

In the actual version, the system is set to offer the following operative modes:

a) Disabled

In this mode the system is completely disabled and neither talk or listen can take place.

b) Listen

In this mode the operator can listen to the patient voice from the remote console.

c) Talk

In this mode the patient can hear the remote console operator’s voice.

648 / 671
1 / 10
The operator can select the operative modes a, b, c, using the control buttons integrated in the
Unit keyboard. In particular:

The selected operative mode is indicated to the operator by means of the Intercom controls
buttons signaling led as detailed in the following table:

Listen pushbutton led:

Off ==> Listen disabled.


On ==> Listen enabled.

Talk pushbutton led:

Off ==> Talk disabled.


On ==> Talk enabled.

650 / 671
2 / 10

651 / 671
18.2. INTERCOM SYSTEM OPERATION

For a better understanding of the following explanations, it is suggested to use


as reference the console CPU board electrical drawing ref. CSA00S5706

The complete system is composed by two similar circuits; the operator side is set to be controlled
by the external buttons, while the patient side one is in a fixed bi-directional configuration (no
control provided).

Each card is essentially composed of the following functional blocks

ANALOG To Intercom
TX Control Analog
Pre-amplifier Circuit
TX Driver
(only operator side) other side
MICROPHONE

ANALOG From Intercom


Power RX Control Analog Circuit
amplifier RX Buffer other side
(only operator side)
SPEAKER

CLISIS
SWITCHING +12V dc
30V dc
BUS POWER
SUPPLY -12V dc

We can now take in analysis the single blocks as seen on the above block diagram.

a) Operator side Signal transmission block

The microphone signal enters in the pre-amplification block that amplifies the analog signal.
The pre-amplification stage also supplies the necessary power for the microphone.

The analog TX control block controls the signal intensity to transmit in Talk by means of the
trimmer PT9,
The transmission block analog TX driver transforms the single ended analog signal in a differential
one (analog differential + and - signals). This differential analog signal enters in the differential
receiver block of the other card.

The analog differential transmission gives a high immunity to the common mode noise injected on
the interconnection cable.

652 / 671
3 / 10
b) Operator side Signal receiving and amplifying block

The analog differential signal coming from the patient side card is re-converted in a single ended
one by the circuit contained in the RX buffer functional block. The signal in output from this stage
enters in the analog RX control circuit.

The listening volume could be adjusted by means of the trimmer PT6. An additional tone control
could be made using the trimmer PT4.

At the output of the analog RX control is connected the final amplifying stage at which output
(CN1015) is connected the speaker. The connector CN1016 is only predisposed for an auxiliary
secondary speaker or for another use of the audio signal.

The power supply block using the 30 Volt DC generates the +12 Volt DC and -12 Volt DC
voltages.

The Intercom functions are controlled by the console micro-controller that provides the correct
analog switches enable signals (of the analog control blocks), according to the operator
commands.

c) Patient side Signal transmission block

The microphone signal enters in the pre-amplification block that amplifies the analog signal. The
pre-amplification stage also supplies the necessary power for the two microphones.

The TX analog control block is mainly composed by a volume control circuit that, by means of the
trimmer PT1, controls the signal intensity to transmit to the operator side circuit.
The transmission block TX analog transformer transforms the single ended analog signal in a
differential one (analog differential + and - signals). This differential analog signal enters in the
differential receiver block of the other card.

The analog differential transmission gives a high immunity to the common mode noise injected on
the interconnection cable.

d) Patient side Signal receiving and amplifying block

The analog differential signal coming from the operator side card is re-converted in a single ended
one by the circuit contained in the RX buffer functional block. The signal in output from this stage
enters in the analog RX control circuit.

The RX analog control block is essentially composed by a volume control circuit that, by means of
the trimmer PT2, controls the patient listening volume. An additional tone control could be made
using the trimmer PT3.

At the output of the analog RX control is connected the final amplifying stage at which output
(CN514) is connected the speaker. The connector CN515 is only predisposed for an auxiliary
secondary speaker or for another use of the audio signal.

The power supply block using the 30 Volt DC generates the +12 Volt DC and -12 Volt DC
voltages.

654 / 671
4 / 10

655 / 671
The commands that enable/disable the different working mode are the following:

Enable to button:

The “enable to” command, activate / deactivate (toggle function) the voice channel from the
operator side to the patient side. The volume on this channel is controlled by PT9 on the operator
side card. The status “activated” is signalled by the LED of the button.

Enable from button:

The “enable from” command, activate / deactivate (toggle function) the voice channel from the
patient side to the operator side. The volume on this channel is controlled, on the operator side
card, by PT6 (if internal volume control is selected). The status “activated” is signalled by the LED
of the button.

656 / 671
5 / 10
18.3 INTERCOM SYSTEM CALIBRATION

The intercom calibration procedure must be carried out in two different steps:

a) Jumper setting and trimmer pre-calibration

b) Additional intercom system calibrations (if is necessary).

Jumper setting and trimmer pre-calibration at control desk side:

Set the jumpers and the trimmers mounted on the Console CPU board as hereinafter indicated:

SW8 jumper 1-2


SW9 jumper 1-2

PT4 Max. CCW


PT5 Max CCW
PT6 5 TURNS CW from the CCW end of travel
PT7 Max CCW
PT8 Max CCW
PT9 5 turns CW from the CCW end of travel

Trimmer pre-calibration at the patient side:

PT1 max. CW
PT2 max. CW
PT3 max. CCW

658 / 671
6 / 10

659 / 671
Additional intercom system calibrations

Once the jumpers have been properly set and the trimmers have been pre-adjusted,
additional calibrations of the Intercom circuit might be required.
IN THIS CASE SUCH CALIBRATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ON THE
INTERCOM INTERFACE BOARD MOUNTED INTO THE CONTROL DESK.
DO NOT MODIFY THE CALIBRATION OF THE INTERCOM SYSTEM PCB AT
THE PATIENT SIDE.

Listen mode - operator side speaker volume adjusting:

The volume related to the operator side speaker is controlled by means of the trimmer PT6; Acting
CW on PT6 the volume increases.

Pay also attention that the patient side microphone might detect the sound signal
generated by the console side speaker. In this case the system could enter in a
close loop auto oscillation and the only way to eliminate this effect is to reduce the
amplification level.
Therefor is suggested to be sure that only the Listen mode is enabled and that the
talk mode is disabled before attempting this adjustment.

Talk mode - patient side speaker volume adjusting:

The volume related to the patient side speaker is controlled by means of the trimmer PT9; Acting
CW on PT9 the volume increases.

Pay also attention that the console microphone might detect the sound signal
generated by the patient side speaker. In this case the system could enter in a close
loop auto oscillation and the only way to eliminate this effect is to reduce the
amplification level.
Therefor is suggested to be sure that only the Talk mode is enabled and that the
Listen mode is disabled before attempting this adjustment.

660 / 671
7 / 10
Tone adjusting:

The tone adjusting by means of the trimmer PT4 is considered not necessary. For this
reason please, leaves the trimmer PT4 in the factory position (full CCW).

662 / 671
8 / 10

663 / 671
664 / 671
9 / 10

665 / 671
CN514 - SPEAKER CONNECTOR

o CN515 - AUX SPEAKER CONNECTOR

QQ
PT1 -TALK VOLUME
In 9V

z csa
PT2 - LISTEN VOLUME
(-)
ft.G.7

LI
1-1
18 ìl __ I C
.- —.
1
PT3 - TONE ADJ.
230 e.,

C62
C63 ____ C" LI_
gn
da,.
rio O CN512 - MICROPHONE CONNECTOR

r <> CN513 - MICROPHONE CONNECTOR

10 / 10
666 / 671
19. END OF LIFE
IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR MEDICAL EQUIPMENT PROFESSIONAL USERS

Under article 13 of Legislative Decree of the 25 July 2005, n. 151 "Fulfilment of the Directives
2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC and 2003/108/EC, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment and waste disposal

The symbol positioned on the equipment or on its packing box indicates that at the equipment
end of working life must be separately collected from normal urban solid waste. In details, the waste
collection of the equipment components end of working life has to be organized in the following way:

a) Directly from the user, in case he will decide to get rid of the equipment components without
replacing the equipment with a new equivalent and the same functions one.

b) From the manufacturing point of view, referring to the first who introduced and sold it in Italy or
sold the equipment with its manufacture brand name. In case the user decided to get rid of the
equipment and buy in concomitance a same functions new equipment, the user will have the
opportunity to require to the producer to pick up the old equipment within 15 days starting from
the delivery date of new one.

The proper separated waste collection in order to start the recycle and do proper treatment in
compatible environmental disposal, contribute to avoid possible negative effects on the environmental
and on the human health and aid the reinvestment and/or the recycle of the equipment materials. The
operator equipment components operator abusive disposal material will involve the imposition of the
penalty under the current provisions of law

Registration reference in A.E.E. N°: IT08020000001514

667 / 671
1/3
This unit falls under the WEEE directive (2002/96/EC) and the national law transposing the directive

The following instructions are directed to the operator directly involved in disposal and treatment of
waste components inside the unit for environmental protection.

This equipment must not be disposed of as normal urban solid waste: it must be taken to
an expert waste disposal centre or returned to the dealer, would you wish to replace it
with a new model

When disposing the device, special care must be taken when handling the following components as
these can be hazardous:
The Image intensifier contains sparking material (Thallium-doped Cesium Iodide); it
also contains lead which must be considered as a toxic material.
- The LCD monitor contains a vacuum input screen which, should it break, can send
shards of glass flying and disperse powder and gas that may be toxic.
- The lead used to shield some parts of the table (i.e. collimator and SFD) is a toxic material
and must be treated as such.
- The equipment contains printed circuit boards which contain a certain amount of lead:
this is a toxic material and must be treated as such.

When disposing the device, special care must be taken when handling the control circuit and all
components detailed in the following figure:

668 / 671
2 / 3

669 / 671
The unit must be disassembled and displaced by qualified personnel in order to
prevent the possibility of hazard situations.

Other parts of the equipment are composed of:

• Ferrous material (frames etc.).


• Plastic component (guards etc.).
• Wiring.
All parts should be disposed of in accordance with the prevailing regulations in each country at the
moment of removal from operation

In order to access the different parts detailed in the previous figure, it is necessary to
remove the unit covers as described in the unit service manual.

670 / 671
3/3

You might also like